JP2008043390A - Slot machine using game balls - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine using game balls, capable of effectively increasing player's expectations of a special winning combination without largely affecting a putout rate and preventing the decrease of the number of game balls that a player can acquire in a special game. <P>SOLUTION: A CPU 41a derives a chance spot when misfetching the special winning combination or one ball (1) or (2), and makes JAC accompanied by the putout of 75 balls be simultaneously won as well in the case of the winning of one ball (1) or (2) during a regular bonus. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and in particular, setting a bet number using a game ball The present invention relates to a slot machine using a game ball capable of playing a game.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . Then, a prize is generated according to the display mode derived when the rotation of all the reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles that accompany game value such as medals and pachinko balls, replay characters that can start the next game without using game value, regular bonuses and big bonuses for players. There are bonus combinations with a transition to an advantageous gaming state. In particular, the bonus combination is not limited to the winning game, and a large profit can be obtained as a whole over a certain period after the winning. Therefore, the player is most interested in the occurrence of the winning combination.

  Further, in this type of slot machine, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not the derivation of the winning display result of each role including the bonus role is allowed, and when the winning is won in this internal lottery, the variable display device In addition to controlling the combinations of symbols corresponding to the winning prizes to be matched, and controlling not to match the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning prizes not won in the internal lottery, the winning combination is made according to the matched symbol combinations. What is generated is common.

  As a reel control method in a slot machine, there are mainly a control method and a table method. In the control method, when a stop operation is performed, it is determined whether or not the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is located within the drawing range to the winning line, and if the symbol is within the drawing range, the symbol is drawn into the winning line. If the symbol that does not correspond to the lottery result is located on the winning line, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped on the winning line. The kick control is performed so as not to occur (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, in the table system, a reel table that defines a symbol to be stopped on the winning line at each stop operation timing is stored in advance, and when the stop operation is performed, a reel table corresponding to the lottery result of the game is stored. With reference to the timing at which the stop operation is performed, the above-described pull-in control and kick-off control are realized by performing control to stop the symbols determined on the reel table on the winning line (for example, Patent Documents) 1).

  On the other hand, in order to increase the above-mentioned expectation for winning the transitional role, a plurality of reel tables for causing display results (so-called chances) that can be expected to win the transitional role appear in the game when the transitional role is not won. The thing which uses continuously over is proposed (for example, refer patent document 2).

  In addition, when a transitional role is missed when a transitional role is elected, or when a specific role to which a gaming value (medal, etc.) is given due to winning a prize when a transitional role is not elected, The display result (so-called chance item) that can be expected to be won is derived, and when the chance item is derived, the transitional role may be elected for a certain period regardless of whether or not the transitional role has been elected. In some cases, the announcement effect indicating the sex is controlled with a high probability, and the expectation of winning the transitional role is enhanced by both the chance eyes and the announcement effect (for example, see Patent Document 3).

  In addition, the regular bonus described above is generally defined as a gaming state that ends when the number of games won and / or the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games. It is defined as a gaming state in which a regular bonus is repeatedly provided when a predetermined condition such as symbol derivation is established. Here, in the small role game provided between the regular bonus and the regular bonus as a big bonus, there is a game in which the winning probability of the small role is made higher than the normal gaming state (for example, see Patent Document 4).

JP-A-2-283385 JP 2002-810 A JP 2005-168851 A JP-A-6-327809

  However, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, in the case of using the control method as the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device, the pull-in control and the kicking control are uniquely performed according to the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, the display result is monotonous and lacks interest. On the other hand, in the case of using the table method as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 2, by preparing a plurality of reel tables for one lottery result, the lottery result is the same. However, it is possible to derive different display results and diversify the display results, but it is necessary to perform lottery for selecting one table from a plurality of reel tables with respect to one lottery result. There is a problem that the control process becomes complicated because the control process increases.

  In addition, as in the slot machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 3, when a chance combination as described above is derived when a specific combination to which a gaming value (medal or the like) is given is lost, for example, the appearance of a chance eye In order to increase the frequency, if the winning probability of the specific combination in the internal lottery is increased, there is a problem that the payout rate in the slot machine becomes too high.

  Further, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 4, the types of small roles that are won in the small role game are basically the same as in the normal gaming state, and even when the internal lottery is won and a prize is won. In some cases, a small role that is given less gaming value than other types of small roles may be won. In this way, if a prize is awarded to a small role that is given only a small amount of gaming value even if the prize is won, compared to the case where a prize is awarded to another type of small role that is given more gaming value than this, There was a problem that the profits made would be small. In particular, when the number of winning games is determined as an end condition, winning a small role with a small number of game value grants would be a big disadvantage for the player. It was.

  The present invention has been made by paying attention to such problems, and it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the special role without complicating the control and without greatly affecting the payout rate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that uses a game ball that can be increased and can be prevented from decreasing the number of game balls that a player can acquire in a special game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a slot machine using a game ball according to claim 1 of the present invention,
A plurality of variables that can be variably displayed by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel);
A take-in device (take-in device 100) for taking in game balls owned by the player;
A take-in request operation unit (one-ball take-in switch 5, MAXBET switch 6) which is operated when requesting take-in of game balls;
When the capture request operation unit is operated, capture control means for performing capture control (capture control processing) for causing the capture device to perform a capture operation for capturing the game ball by the capture device ( CPU 41a)
Bet number setting means (BET process by the CPU 41a) for setting the bet number in accordance with the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
When a predetermined number of bets (1 or 3) are set for one game by the bet number setting means, the game can be started and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) using a game ball in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived (at the start of the game), the number of game balls (one ball) equal to or less than the number necessary to set the maximum bet number that can be set for one game A specific award winning display result (1 ball (1), 1 ball (2)) and a predetermined award winning display result (75 balls) more than the specific award winning display result (75 balls) JAC) and a special prize display result (Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (With Big Bonus) with a transition of a special gaming state (Big Bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state) 2)), and a pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the derivation of the winning display result including
Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
In the special gaming state (big bonus), a special game (regular bonus) in which the pre-determining means determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the derivation of the awarded prize display result (small role) is allowed. ) Special game control means (game end processing by the CPU 41a) for controlling for a predetermined period (a period until 12 games are reached or until 8 wins),
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. From a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify a display result (stop position) derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time of operation (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol), Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result (internal winning state) of the pre-decision means (selecting data creation tables corresponding to all reels at the start of reel rotation and selecting the selected data) Processing to create a stop control table corresponding to all reels from the creation table)
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area (control for stopping the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table) Done
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the prior determination means that the derivation of the special prize display result (big bonus (1) / big bonus (2)) is allowed, at least one of the steps Specific display results ("Replay / Watermelon / No. 2-4 symbols that make up the chance eye" for numbers (area numbers 6-8, 12-14, 17 / area numbers 4-7, 12-14, 17) Special winning control pattern (BB (1) RB / BB (2) specifying "Bell", "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of 8-10 symbols, "Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon" of 15-17 designs) ) A special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item),
Display that constitutes the specific prize-winning display result when it is determined by the prior decision means that the derivation of the specific prize-winning display result (one ball (1) / 1 ball (2)) is permitted The number of steps (region numbers 4 to 4) different from the number of steps (region numbers 1 to 3, 16 to 21 / region numbers 9 to 15) for specifying the result (display result including “blue 7” symbol / “red 7” symbol) 15 / region numbers 1 to 8, 16 to 21), the specific display result is obtained for at least one step number (region numbers 4 to 8, 10 to 14 / region numbers 6 to 8 and 17 to 21). A specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a specific award winning control pattern to be identified (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of 1 ball (1) / 1 ball (2));
When it is determined that the derivation of any winning display result is not permitted by the pre-determining means (losing), display results other than the specific display result are obtained from any of the step numbers. Non-winning control pattern selection means for selecting a non-winning control pattern to be identified (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of loss);
Including
When the pre-determining means determines to permit the derivation of the specific prize-winning display result (one ball (1), one ball (2)) in a state controlled by the special game, the predetermined grant At the same time, it is determined that the derivation of the winning display result (JAC) is permitted.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the step of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-decision means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number, and the display result is derived to the corresponding variable display area. Control is performed. That is, only one control pattern is applied to the determination result of one pre-determining means, and it is not necessary to select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns, and the display result of the variable display device is derived. It does not complicate the control when making it.
In addition, it may be determined whether the derivation of the special winning award display result is permitted by the pre-determining means, or the specific award winning display result is permitted to be derived, and the specific award winning display result is derived. When it is not possible, it is possible to derive a specific display result that is not derived when any of the winning display results is not allowed to be derived by the predetermining means, so that a specific display result is derived. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the derivation of the special prize display result is permitted.
In addition, when it is not determined that the derivation of the special winning display result is permitted, when the derivation of any winning display result is not permitted by the predetermining means, that is, in the state that occupies most of the normal times, a specific Since the display result is not derived and the decision to permit the derivation of the specific award winning display result is made by the predetermining means, the specific display result can be derived. Even when a control pattern corresponding to the determination result is uniquely selected, it is possible to derive a specific display result at an appropriate ratio without being affected by the skill of the player.
In addition, since the specific award winning is a prize accompanied by the granting of game balls equal to or less than the number necessary for setting the maximum betable number that can be set for one game, the specific award winning display result is derived by the predetermining means. Even if the specific grant award cannot be generated when the player is allowed, not only will the player suffer a large disadvantage, but the probability of deriving the specified grant award display result will contribute to the payout rate of the slot machine. Since there is no significant influence, for example, it is possible to increase the probability of deriving the specific award display result and increase the chances of deriving the specific display result. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation.
In addition, when it is determined to allow the derivation of the specific award winning display result in which the number of game balls to be awarded is smaller than the predetermined award winning display result when controlled by the special game, It is also determined that derivation is allowed. In a special game, there is a possibility that at least a predetermined prize-winning display result can be derived based on this determination. When it is determined that the derivation of the predetermined award winning display result is permitted, the predetermined award winning display result is derived even if the derivation of the specific award winning display result with a smaller number of game balls to be given is permitted. In this case, the player can obtain a predetermined number of game balls, and the number of game balls to be given does not become smaller than the predetermined number. For this reason, it can prevent that the number of game balls which a player can acquire in a special game decreases.

In addition, in claim 1, to uniquely select a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit means that the same control pattern is always selected when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the determination results of the prior determination means are different.
Further, in claim 1, the special prize control pattern selection means (specific awarded prize control pattern selection means) is a special prize control pattern only for one variable display area among the variable display areas for which a display result has not yet been derived. Select a special prize-winning control pattern (specific prize-winning control pattern) for any two or more variable display areas from among those that select (specific prize-winning control pattern) and variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Alternatively, a special winning control pattern (specific award winning control pattern) may be selected for all variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Further, the non-winning control pattern selecting means is a variable display area in which a special winning control pattern (specific awarded winning control pattern) is selected in the special winning control pattern selecting means (specific awarded winning control pattern selecting means). Any non-winning control pattern may be selected.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 2 of the present invention,
A plurality of variables that can be variably displayed by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel);
A take-in device (take-in device 100) for taking in game balls owned by the player;
A take-in request operation unit (one-ball take-in switch 5, MAXBET switch 6) which is operated when requesting take-in of game balls;
When the capture request operation unit is operated, capture control means for performing capture control (capture control processing) for causing the capture device to perform a capture operation for capturing the game ball by the capture device ( CPU 41a)
Bet number setting means (BET process by the CPU 41a) for setting the bet number in accordance with the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
When a predetermined number of bets (1 or 3) are set for one game by the bet number setting means, the game can be started and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) using a game ball in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived (at the start of the game), the number of game balls (one ball) equal to or less than the number necessary to set the maximum bet number that can be set for one game A specific award winning display result (1 ball (1), 1 ball (2)) and a predetermined award winning display result (75 balls) more than the specific award winning display result (75 balls) JAC) and a special prize display result (Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (With Big Bonus) with a transition of a special gaming state (Big Bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state) 2)), and a pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the derivation of the winning display result including
Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
In the special gaming state (big bonus), a special game (regular bonus) in which the pre-determining means determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the derivation of the awarded prize display result (small role) is allowed. ) Special game control means (game end processing by the CPU 41a) for controlling for a predetermined period (a period until 12 games are reached or until 8 wins),
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. Display results derived for the variable display area with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated. A combination of the determination result of the predetermination means (internal winning state) and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived (stop position of the stopped reel) from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely identify A control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to (when any one of the reels is stopped, the data pattern corresponding to the other reel Select iodide table includes a process) to create a stop control table corresponding to the reel in the change from the selected data generation table,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Performing a control for deriving a display result uniquely specified from the number of steps as a display result of the variable display area (a control for stopping the reel at a stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table),
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the prior determination means that the derivation of the special prize display result (big bonus (1) / big bonus (2)) is allowed, at least one of the steps Specific display results ("Replay / Watermelon / No. 2-4 symbols that make up the chance eye" for numbers (area numbers 6-8, 12-14, 17 / area numbers 4-7, 12-14, 17) Special winning control pattern (BB (1) RB / BB (2) specifying "Bell", "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of 8-10 symbols, "Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon" of 15-17 designs) ) A special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item),
Display that constitutes the specific prize-winning display result when it is determined by the prior decision means that the derivation of the specific prize-winning display result (one ball (1) / 1 ball (2)) is permitted The number of steps (region numbers 4 to 4) different from the number of steps (region numbers 1 to 3, 16 to 21 / region numbers 9 to 15) for specifying the result (display result including “blue 7” symbol / “red 7” symbol) 15 / region numbers 1 to 8, 16 to 21), the specific display result is displayed for at least one step number (region numbers 4 to 8, 10 to 14 / region numbers 6 to 8 and 17 to 21). A specific award winning control pattern selection means for selecting a specific award winning control pattern to be identified (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of 1 ball (1) / 1 ball (2));
When it is determined that the derivation of any winning display result is not permitted by the pre-determining means (losing), display results other than the specific display result are obtained from any of the step numbers. Non-winning control pattern selection means for selecting a non-winning control pattern to be identified (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of loss);
Including
When the pre-determining means determines to permit the derivation of the specific prize-winning display result (one ball (1), one ball (2)) in a state controlled by the special game, the predetermined grant At the same time, it is determined that the derivation of the winning display result (JAC) is permitted.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result has not yet been derived. The determination result of the predetermining means from the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area where the derivation operation means is operated In addition, a control pattern corresponding to the combination of display results of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns Need not be further selected, and the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device is not complicated.
In addition, it may be determined whether the derivation of the special winning award display result is permitted by the pre-determining means, or the specific award winning display result is permitted to be derived, and the specific award winning display result is derived. When it is not possible, it is possible to derive a specific display result that is not derived when any of the winning display results is not allowed to be derived by the predetermining means, so that a specific display result is derived. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the derivation of the special prize display result is permitted.
In addition, when it is not determined that the derivation of the special winning display result is permitted, when the derivation of any winning display result is not permitted by the predetermining means, that is, in the state that occupies most of the normal times, a specific Since the display result is not derived and the decision to permit the derivation of the specific award winning display result is made by the predetermining means, the specific display result can be derived. Even when a control pattern corresponding to the determination result is uniquely selected, it is possible to derive a specific display result at an appropriate ratio without being affected by the skill of the player.
In addition, since the specific award winning is a prize accompanied by the granting of game balls equal to or less than the number necessary for setting the maximum betable number that can be set for one game, the specific award winning display result is derived by the predetermining means. Even if the specific grant award cannot be generated when the player is allowed, not only will the player suffer a large disadvantage, but the probability of deriving the specified grant award display result will contribute to the payout rate of the slot machine. Since there is no significant influence, for example, it is possible to increase the probability of deriving the specific award display result and increase the chances of deriving the specific display result. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation.
In addition, when it is determined to allow the derivation of the specific award winning display result in which the number of game balls to be awarded is smaller than the predetermined award winning display result when controlled by the special game, It is also determined that derivation is allowed. In a special game, there is a possibility that at least a predetermined prize-winning display result can be derived based on this determination. When it is determined that the derivation of the predetermined award winning display result is permitted, the predetermined award winning display result is derived even if the derivation of the specific award winning display result with a smaller number of game balls to be given is permitted. In this case, the player can obtain a predetermined number of game balls, and the number of game balls to be given does not become smaller than the predetermined number. For this reason, it can prevent that the number of game balls which a player can acquire in a special game decreases.

In addition, in claim 2, to uniquely select a control pattern corresponding to the combination of the determination result of the prior determination unit and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is determined by the determination of the prior determination unit When the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is the same, the same control pattern is always selected. This does not preclude selecting a common control pattern when the display results of the variable display areas from which the results are derived are different.
Further, in claim 2, the special winning control pattern selecting means (specific award winning control pattern selecting means) special winning control pattern only for any one of the variable display areas in which the display result has not yet been derived. Select a special prize-winning control pattern (specific prize-winning control pattern) for any two or more variable display areas from among those that select (specific prize-winning control pattern) and variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. In addition, a special winning control pattern (specific award winning control pattern) may be selected for all of the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived, and furthermore, the variable display areas for which display results have already been derived. As long as the display results are derived in a specific order, the display results are not yet derived in the variable display area. There are may be configured to select a special winning control pattern (specific grant winning control pattern). Further, the non-winning control pattern selecting means is a variable display area in which a special winning control pattern (specific awarded winning control pattern) is selected in the special winning control pattern selecting means (specific awarded winning control pattern selecting means). Any non-winning control pattern may be selected.

Further, in claims 1 and 2, the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. You may make it become. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
In addition, in the first and second aspects, the awarded prize display result may be any game ball that is given in accordance with the derivation of the prize display result. It may be derived, or a different type of award winning display result may be derived.
Further, in claims 1 and 2, the special game control means that the special game is controlled to a special game for a predetermined period in the special game state. After the transition to the special game state, a predetermined condition (for example, a transition prize display result) May be controlled to a special game for a predetermined period of time when a special game state is established, or a game that is always controlled to a special game in a special game state (for example, after a transition to a special game state, The game may be controlled to a special game when it is not controlled by the game or when the special game state is not finished after the special game is finished).
In addition, in the first and second aspects, the period during which the special game control means controls the special game is such that when the special game is started, a predetermined number of games (one game or a plurality of games may be used). The game may be controlled until a special game is reached, or after the special game has started, a special game end condition (for example, a specified number of times (even once) may be set) It may be good or may be a plurality of times), and the game may be controlled to a special game until the occurrence of a prize is established. Furthermore, even if a special game is reached until a predetermined number of games is reached after a special game starts or a predetermined special game end condition is met, the special game is controlled. good.

In addition, when the predetermined prize-winning display result is derived as a display result of the variable display device in any one of claims 1 and 2, a game given when any other kind of prize-winning display result is derived It is preferable that game balls having more than the number of balls are provided. In this case, the player can obtain the maximum profit by deriving a predetermined prize display result in the special game.
Further, in claim 1 or 2, the specific display result may be a display result different from a display result constituting the special prize display result, or the same display result as the special prize display result. May be displayed.
In addition, the control pattern for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated in claims 1 and 2 is the operation of the derivation operation means. Is the control pattern that always specifies the same display result as the derived display result when the number of steps at the same time is the same, for example, the number of individual steps, or a step number unit that is continuous within a certain range (for example, The amount of variation in which the amount of variation until the display result is derived is determined for each identification code (for example, symbol number, etc.) that can identify the step number unit). From the table, the control pattern that uniquely identifies the display result derived for the number of steps when the derivation operation means is operated, the number of individual steps, or The step at the time when the derivation operation means is operated from the priority table in which the priority of the derived display result is determined for each step number unit that is continuous within a certain range or for each identification code that can identify the step number unit. A control pattern that uniquely identifies a display result derived for a number is applicable. In addition, from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated, pull-in control is performed so that the display result to be drawn is maximized within a predetermined pull-in range, so that the display result is not derivation prohibited. For those that perform kick-off control that draws display results other than the display results for which derivation is prohibited, if the display result derived from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated is uniquely specified, This corresponds to the control pattern of the present invention.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 3 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1 or 2,
The specific award winning control pattern (reel stop control by the stop control table corresponding to the item of 1 ball (1) / 1 ball (2)) is the result of the specific award winning display result (1 ball ( 1) / 1 When the decision to allow derivation of one ball (2)) is made, the specific award winning display result (display result including “blue 7” symbol / “red 7” symbol) is specified Step number (region numbers 1 to 3, 16 to 21 / region numbers 9 to 15) more specific than the number of steps region numbers 4 to 8, 10 to 14 / region numbers 6 to 8 and 17 to 21) Display results ("Replay Watermelon Bell" of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, "Bell Red 7 Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols, "Replay Blue 7 of the 15th to 17th symbols" Identify watermelon "),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when it is determined that the derivation of the specific award winning display result is permitted by the predetermining means, the specific display result is derived rather than the display result constituting the specific award winning display result. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the derivation of the special prize display result.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 4 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The special winning control pattern (reel stop control by the stop control table corresponding to the items of BB (1) RB, BB (2))
The special winning control pattern selecting means selects when the pre-determining means determines that the derivation of the first special winning display result (big bonus (1)) among the special winning display results is permitted. Display results (region numbers 7-9, 8) constituting the first special winning display result for at least one of the step numbers (region numbers 9-15). To 10 and 9 to 11), the first special winning control pattern (reel stop control by the stop control table corresponding to the item BB (1) RB),
The special winning control pattern selecting means selects when the pre-determining means determines that the second special winning display result (big bonus (2)) out of the special winning display results is allowed. At least one of the number of steps different from the number of steps (region numbers 9 to 15) for specifying the display result for which the first special winning control pattern constitutes the first special winning display result. Display results (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, which constitute the second special prize display result for one step number (area numbers 1-3, 16-21) A second special winning control pattern (reel stop control by the stop control table corresponding to the item of BB (2)) specifying 18 to 20 display results),
Including
The specific award winning control pattern (reel stop control by the stop control table corresponding to the item of one ball (1)) is a display result in which the first special winning control pattern constitutes the first special winning display result. For the number of steps (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) out of the number of steps different from the number of steps for specifying the area (area numbers 9 to 15). )) To specify display results (display results of area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the operation by the derivation operation means is performed aiming at the display result constituting the first special prize display result, the display result constituting the specific awarded prize display result cannot be derived, and the specific result When the display result is derived, it is not possible to determine whether the specific award winning display result could not be derived or the other second special winning display result could not be derived. The player's expectation for the derivation of the display result can be maintained.
The specific award winning control pattern includes at least one step number of the same number of steps as the number of steps in which the second special winning control pattern specifies the display result constituting the second special winning display result. The number of steps for specifying the display result constituting the second special prize display result by the second special prize control pattern may be further specified with respect to You may further specify the display result which comprises the said specific prize-winning with respect to at least 1 step number of different step numbers.
In addition, the first special prize display result and the second special prize display result may be special prize display results for shifting to the same special game state, respectively, and the degree of advantage and game characteristics for the player It may be a special winning display result that shifts to different types of special gaming states that are different from each other.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 5 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The pre-determining means determines whether or not the derivation of the predetermined prize-winning display result is allowed only in the special game (JAC is subject to internal lottery and winning only in the regular bonus)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the predetermined prize-winning display result is a prize display result that is only applicable in the special game and not in other game states, and the predetermined prize-winning result can be generated only in the special game. In addition, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the special game and the other game states, and it is possible to differentiate between the special game and the other game states.

A slot machine using a game ball according to means 1 of the present invention is a slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
Data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), a ratio (winning probability) determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery) whether or not the derivation of the winning display result is allowed is determined. An allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting one of the allowable stages from a plurality of different allowable stages (setting values);
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
Storage data determination means (determination of RAM parity and determination of destruction diagnosis data by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determining means determines that the data stored in the data storing means is not normal (when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM data is abnormal) RAM error error state)
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. The disabling canceling means for canceling the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed (when the CPU 41a shifts to the RAM abnormal error state, the setting value is newly selected and set by the setting changing process, so that the game Return to processing)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, the progress of the game is disabled, and an allowable stage (set value) is newly set based on the operation of the setting operation means. If the game is not selected or set, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, it is not an allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine, but an allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means (general In addition, since the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is played based on the permissible stage selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game should be ensured Can do.

A slot machine using a game ball according to means 2 of the present invention is a slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1,
Data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), a ratio (winning probability) determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery) whether or not the derivation of the winning display result is allowed is determined. An allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting one of the allowable stages from a plurality of different allowable stages (setting values);
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
Permissible stage data judging means for judging whether or not the data indicating the permissible stage stored in the permissible stage storage area for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible stage that can be selected by the permissible stage selecting means ( Set value determination processing 1) by the CPU 41a;
Disabling means (error processing by the CPU 41a) for disabling the progress of the game when the allowable stage data determination means determines that the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area is not appropriate data. )When,
After the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the disabling of the progress of the game is canceled on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means, and the progress of the game Disabling cancellation means (transition to game processing by the CPU 41a),
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when it is determined for each game whether or not the data indicating the allowable stage that determines the percentage of the derivation of the winning display result is appropriate, and it is determined that the data indicating the allowable stage is not appropriate The game progress is disabled. That is, if the data indicating the allowable level is not appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selection means, the data indicating the allowable level may be illegally rewritten. Is disabled. The state in which the progress of the game is disabled is canceled by newly selecting and setting an allowable stage (setting value) based on the operation of the setting operation means. For this reason, in order to resume the game when there is a possibility that the data indicating the allowable level has been illegally rewritten, the operation of changing the allowable level is more time-consuming than the reset operation for canceling the normal error. Since it is necessary, such fraud can be effectively prevented.
Also, if there is a possibility that the data indicating the allowable stage has been illegally rewritten, the allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means, not the allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine Since the game is played based on (generally, the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the game shop, which is an allowable stage selected by the game shop side), the game is fair. be able to.
Note that the permissible stage data determination means is configured to store the data at least once at any timing of one game (for example, at the start or end of the game, or at the time of execution of a process that is always executed for each game). What is necessary is just to determine whether or not the data indicating the allowable level stored in the storage means is appropriate data indicating the allowable level selectable by the allowable level selecting means.
Further, the permissible stage data determination means determines whether or not the data indicating the permissible stage stored in the data storage means for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible stage that can be selected by the permissible stage selection means. Although the determination is made, the data is stored when the permissible stage data determination means does not execute every game but a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, every predetermined number of games, a game excluding a special game state advantageous to the player). Whether or not the data indicating the allowable level stored in the means is appropriate data indicating the allowable level selectable by the allowable level selecting means may be determined. The same effect as that of the invention of 2 can be obtained.

A slot machine using the game ball according to means 3 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 and 2,
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numeric data input means (random number acquisition processing by the CPU 41a) for inputting to the determination area as a random number for lottery),
The winning display result is determined such that a range of determination values that the predetermination means determines to permit derivation of the determination numerical data input to the determination area can be specified. Range specifying data storage means for storing the specified range specifying data (number of determination values) (role-specific table and storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b);
With
The range specifying data storage means simultaneously permits the derivation of both the special winning display result (special role) and the normal winning display result (small role, replaying role) other than the special winning display result as the range specifying data. The overlapping range specifying data (the number of determination values for determining the winning of both the small role or the re-playing role and the special role) that can specify the range of the determination value that will be determined to be stored is stored,
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including a winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not the display result is permitted to be derived, and permitting the derivation of the winning display result determined by the allowance determining means to indicate that the generation is permitted. (If the sum of the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows, the winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, the special winning display result and the normal winning display result by the predetermining means It is determined that the derivation of both of the two will be allowed at the same time, so there is an expectation that the derivation of the special winning display result is allowed when the normal winning display result is derived as the game result. I can have it. In addition, since the special winning display result and the normal winning display result can be determined by a single allowance determining unit, the processing by the prior determination unit can be simplified.
The range specifying data storage means includes, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values for determining that the derivation of only the special prize display result is permitted, and the special range specifying data. It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify the range of the judgment value that will determine that the derivation of both the winning display result and the normal winning display result is allowed at the same time. Thus, even if the normal winning display result is not derived as a result of the game, it cannot be denied that the special winning display result is permitted to be derived. The player's expectation on what is being done can be sustained.
In addition, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data that can specify the range of the determination value that determines to permit the derivation of only the normal winning display result, and the special range specifying data It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify the range of the judgment value that will determine that the derivation of both the winning display result and the normal winning display result is allowed at the same time. Thus, even if the normal winning display result is derived as a result of the game, it cannot be denied that the special winning display result is allowed to be derived. Therefore, even in such a situation, the special winning display result is permitted to be derived. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation for what is being played.

A slot machine using the game ball according to means 4 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 and 2,
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numeric data input means (random number acquisition processing by the CPU 41a) for inputting to the determination area as a random number for lottery),
With respect to the special prize display result (special role), it is possible to specify a range of determination values that will be determined by the pre-determining means to permit derivation to the determination numerical data input to the determination area. Special winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data (special role judgment value number) determined to be (special role-specific table in ROM 41b and storage area of special role judgment value number); ,
Determining that the pre-determining means permits the derivation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination area for the normal winning display results (small role, re-game player) other than the special winning display result Normal winning range specifying data storage means (small combination and replay in ROM 41b) for storing range specifying data (number of determination values of small combination and replaying combination) determined so that the range of determination values can be specified A table by role for each role and a storage area for the number of judgment values for the small role and the re-playing role), and
With
The range of determination values that will determine that the predetermination means permits the derivation of the special prize display result is determined so that the predetermination means permits the derivation of the normal prize display result. Including a range of judgment values that overlaps with the range of judgment values (a range of judgment values in which a small role or a re-playing role and a special role are won and won)
The pre-determining means includes
Depending on whether or not the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the normal winning range specifying data storage means includes the determination numerical data input to the determination area, A normal winning allowance judging means (lottery process for judging the winning of the small role and the re-gamer) for judging whether or not to permit the derivation;
Whether or not the same range of determination value data as used by the normal winning allowance determining unit is included in the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the special winning range specifying data storage unit A special winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not the derivation of the special winning display result is permitted (a lottery process for determining the winning of a special role);
Including
The pre-determining means is
A determination is made as to whether or not derivation of a winning display result is permitted by both the normal winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means;
Permitting derivation of both the normal winning display result and the special winning display result when it is determined that both the normal winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the winning display result is allowed to be derived. (If the winning process is determined by both the lottery process for determining the winning of the small part and the re-playing part and the lottery process for determining the winning of the special part, Both gamers and special roles are elected)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, the special winning display result and the normal winning display result by the predetermining means It is determined that the derivation of both of the two will be allowed at the same time, so there is an expectation that the derivation of the special winning display result is allowed when the normal winning display result is derived as the game result. I can have it.
It should be noted that the range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to permit the derivation of the special prize display result is determined to determine that the pre-determining means permits the derivation of the normal prize display result. Including a range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values to be performed, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the special winning allowance determining means indicates that derivation of the winning display result is permitted Is determined to permit the derivation of only the special prize display result, and it is determined that both the normal prize acceptance determination means and the special prize permission determination means indicate that the derivation of the prize display result is permitted. It may be determined that the derivation of both the normal winning display result and the special winning display result is allowed. In this way, even if the normal winning display result is not derived as a result of the game, Since it is not denied that the derivation of the special pay display results are acceptable, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for what is allowed is the derivation of the special pay display results in such a situation.
In addition, the range of the determination value that determines that the prior determination unit allows the derivation of the normal winning display result is determined so that the preliminary determination unit allows the special winning display result to be derived. Including a range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values to be determined, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the normal winning allowance determining means indicates that the winning display result is allowed to be derived Is determined to permit the derivation of only the normal winning display result, and it is determined that both the normal winning permission determination unit and the special winning permission determination unit indicate that the derivation of the winning display result is permitted. Further, it may be determined that the derivation of both the normal winning display result and the special winning display result is permitted. In this way, even if the normal winning display result is derived as a game result, the special winning display result may be determined. Since it is not denied that the derivation of the winning display result is allowed, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for what is allowed is the derivation of the special pay display results in such a situation.

  In the means 3 and 4, the range specifying data determined so that the range of the determination value can be specified may be the data itself indicating the range of the determination value, or the determination value of each winning display result. And the total number of determination values may be stored, and the range of determination values may be specified from the total number of determination values and the determination value of each winning display result. Also, the determination value other than the winning display result determined last and the total number of determination values are stored, and the remaining determination value range excluding the determination value other than the winning display result determined last from the total determination value is stored. It may be specified as a range of determination values for the winning display result determined last.

A slot machine using the game ball according to means 5 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 4,
Special game determination means for determining whether or not the special game is controlled in the special game state (determining whether or not the big bonus is in progress and the regular bonus is activated),
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game for each game in the special gaming state (determines whether or not the regular bonus is operating in the big bonus for each game. ),
The special game control means starts control of the special game when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is not controlled (when the regular bonus is not activated in the big bonus) , Start regular bonus),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, while being controlled to the special gaming state, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game for each game. If not controlled by the special game, the control of the special game is started. The game balls can be increased the fastest in the special game state, so that the interest of the player accompanying the transition to the special game state is enhanced rather than the control of the special game being started with some winning as in the past be able to.
Further, since it is determined whether or not each game is controlled by a special game, the control program for each game in the special game state can be shared, so that the program capacity can be reduced.
The special game control means may start control of the special game simultaneously with the start of the special game state. In such a case, the special game control means is controlled while the special game state is being controlled. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled at the end of each game, recognizes the game from which the special prize display result is derived as a special game state, and In the game from which the winning display result is derived, it may be determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game. Even in such a case, the game can be changed to the special game while being controlled to the special game state. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.
Further, the special game determination means does not recognize the game from which the special prize display result is derived as a special game state, and determines whether or not the special game is controlled at the start of each game. Even in this case, it is only necessary to control the special game while it is controlled to the special game state, so that the control accompanying the transition to the special game state can be simplified.

A slot machine using a game ball according to means 6 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 4,
The special game control means resumes the control of the special game when the predetermined period expires after the control of the special game starts and the control of the special game ends (a regular bonus in a big bonus) If the big bonus continues at the end, resume the regular bonus)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control of the special game is ended while the special game state is being controlled, the special game is resumed, so that the number of game balls can be increased most rapidly in the special game state. Thus, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player accompanying the transition to the special game state rather than starting the control of the special game with some winning as in the prior art.
Further, since the process for re-activating the special game is performed only when the control of the special game is finished, unnecessary processing is not performed in a state where the control of the special game is not finished.
The special game control means may start control of the special game simultaneously with the start of the special game state. In such a case, the special game control means is controlled while the special game state is being controlled. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.

A slot machine using a game ball according to means 7 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 6,
Abnormal winning determination data that can specify whether or not derivation of the winning display result is allowed in the game for each bit assigned to each type of winning display result based on the determination result of the prior determination means Abnormal winning determination data setting means for setting (an abnormal winning determination flag in which the value of the bit allocated to the permitted combination is 0 and the value of the bit allocated to the unacceptable combination is 1) ( Conversion to an abnormal winning determination flag by inverting all bits of the winning flag),
After display results are derived for all of the variable display areas, it is possible to specify whether or not the winning display results are derived for each bit assigned for each type of winning display result based on the derived display results Winning result data setting means (all winning reels) for setting winning result data (a winning symbol flag in which the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 0) Processing to create a winning symbol flag from the stopped symbol after the stop of)
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means (Logical AND operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determines whether the result of the logical product operation is 0 or not, that is, other than 0) Processing for determining an abnormal prize when there is at least one value of)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned is calculated in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data, and the result is determined. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning, and it is not necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag of the winning prize that has been established as in the past and check the value of the specified bit. It is also possible to simplify the process when determining whether or not the prize is abnormal.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a base frame 1a (see FIG. 2) fixed to a game island. A main body frame 1b (see FIG. 2) pivotally supported on the side end of the base frame 1a, and a front door 1c pivotally supported on the side end of the main body frame 1b. It is configured.

  Inside the main body frame 1b of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, the three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1c. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 8, on the outer periphery of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko ball used for the game and an upper plate 26 for storing (waiting for) the pachinko ball paid out from the payout device 200 are located below the fluoroscopic window 3 in the front door 1c. The provided operation console 4 is formed so as to bulge forward, and below that is a lower plate 25 for storing pachinko balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 and pachinko balls returned from the upper plate 26. Is provided. An outlet 25a for taking out pachinko balls stored in the lower dish 25 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower dish 25, and the outlet is removed by a sliding operation of a lever 25b provided at the front portion of the lower dish 25. By opening the shutter 25c that closes the 25a, the pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 flow out to a ball box (not shown) disposed below the lower plate 25, and the pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 are removed. It can be easily taken out.

  Further, on the upper surface of the operation table 4, a specified number determined according to the game state from the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the upper plate 26 operated when instructing to take in one pachinko ball from the upper plate 26. When instructing to take in the number of pachinko balls necessary to set the number of bets (3 in the normal gaming state and RT (replay time) described later in this embodiment, 1 in the regular bonus described later) The MAXBET switch 6 to be operated, when the collected balls are settled and returned to the upper plate 26, or the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 and the pachinko balls in the capture device 100 described later are placed in the lower plate 25. The settlement switch 10 that is operated when returning the game, the start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, and the remaining value of the valuable value read from the prepaid card being received in the card unit 400 arranged in parallel. The remaining amount indicator 28 shown, the ball lending switch 29 operated when lending a pachinko ball within the range of the remaining value of the value displayed on the remaining amount indicator 28, and the prepaid being received in the card unit 400 arranged in parallel A return switch 30 that is operated when the card is returned is provided, and a stop switch 8L that is operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is provided on the front surface of the operation table 4. , 8C, 8R are disposed.

  Further, the MAXBET switch 6 has a built-in BET switch effective LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the pachinko ball taking-in operation by the operation of the one-ball taking-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R have left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. 4) is built in each.

  In addition, between the see-through window 3 and the operation table 4 in the front door 1c, the number of used balls used for setting the number of bets taken in by operating the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 was taken in. However, since it is less than the required unit number of balls (5 balls in this embodiment) when setting the minimum unit bet number, it is the sum of the number of unused balls that have not yet been used for setting the bet number. The number of balls already paid out and the number of balls already paid out of the number of winning balls associated with the occurrence of winnings are displayed. And a game auxiliary indicator 12 that displays an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, 1 BET LED 14 that lights up that 1 bet is set, and lights up that 2 bets are set 2BETLED15, 3 bets set 3BETLED 16 that informs that it is being lit, capture request LED 17 that informs that a pachinko ball can be taken in is lit, and that the start operation of the game by operating the start switch 7 is valid A start valid LED 18, a wait LED 19 that lights up to indicate that a wait is in progress (a state in which a reel rotation has not started since a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the previous game), and a replay game to be described later A replaying LED 20 is provided to notify the effect by lighting.

  In addition, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 are returned to the lower plate 25 through the ball removal passage 120 without passing through the take-in device 100 described later at the upper position of the operation table 4 in the front door 1c. A ball removal lever 31 is provided which is operated when the operation is performed.

  The upper plate 26 opened on the upper surface of the operation table 4 and having an open upper surface is composed of a storage portion that is formed wider in the front-rear direction, and a strip-shaped rectification portion that has a shorter front-rear width than the storage portion. The pachinko sphere stored in the storage portion is divided into three strips by two rectifying plates that are erected on the rectifying portion and are directed in the left-right direction, although not shown in detail in detail, into the preparation preparation sphere passage 110. It flows in and is supplied to the capture device 100.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 are divided into three strips by the rectifying unit and supplied to the capture device 100, so that the pachinko balls from the upper plate 26 to the capture device 100 are supplied. It is possible to improve the supply speed, and thereby the pachinko ball uptake speed by the uptake apparatus 100 can also be improved. In this embodiment, it is constituted by three straightening passages, but it may be two or four or more passages.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the downstream part of the rectifying part, that is, the connecting part with the take-in preparation ball passage 110 for guiding and supplying the pachinko ball flowing in from the upper plate 26 to the take-in device 100 is provided. In addition, an outflow port 121 for allowing the pachinko ball flowing down the rectifying unit to flow out into the ball passage 120 is formed. The outlet 121 is opened and closed by an open / close shutter 122 provided to open and close in conjunction with the sliding operation of the ball removal lever 31, and by opening the open / close shutter 122, The pachinko balls flow down from the outlet 121 in the ball removal passage 120, join a return ball guide passage 109 described later, are discharged from the discharge outlet 9, and are returned to the lower plate 25. That is, by opening and closing the opening / closing shutter 122 by operating the ball removal lever 31, the ball connected to the take-up preparation ball passage 110 side that communicates the pachinko ball flow path of the upper plate 26 to the take-in device 100 or the lower plate 25. The pachinko ball of the upper plate 26 is returned to the lower plate 25 without passing through the take-in device 100 by switching to either the extraction passage 120 or the return ball guiding passage 109 side and opening the opening / closing shutter 122. The

  The upper plate 26 is formed in a dish shape whose upper surface is open, so that the stored pachinko balls can be taken out from above by hand, and the pachinko that has flowed down into the operation table 4. The sphere flows down in the take-in preparation sphere passage 110 arranged inside the operation table 4 and is guided to an after-mentioned taking-in device 100 which is also arranged inside the operation table 4. That is, the pachinko ball that has flowed into the take-in preparation sphere passage 110, except for the remaining sphere transparent window 130 (see FIG. 3) formed between the remaining amount indicator 28 and the start switch 7 on the upper surface of the operation table 4, The structure is invisible from the outside and cannot be taken out by hand.

  Inside the front door 1c, a set value display 24 (see FIG. 4) for displaying a set value at that time is provided while changing a set value and confirming the set value, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 1, a take-in device 100 for taking the pachinko balls supplied from the upper plate 26 is provided inside the operation table 4.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the take-in device 100, three sprockets 106 for ball cutting are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction corresponding to the respective strips of the take-in preparation ball passage 110 (in FIG. 3, Only the front sprocket is visible.) Two notches are formed on the outer periphery of the sprocket 106, and when the sprocket 106 is rotated by driving the take-in motor 101, pachinko balls that have entered the notch are discharged downward one by one. It has become. Further, the notches of the sprockets 106 corresponding to the respective strips are arranged so that the arrangement positions in the circumferential direction are different from each other (six notches of the three sprockets 106 are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees), As the three sprockets 106 rotate synchronously, pachinko balls are discharged for each sprocket 106.

  The pachinko balls supplied to the sprocket 106 from the two take-up preparation ball passages 110 out of the three take-up preparation ball passages 110 are discharged from the two sprockets 106 and then merged downstream. Then, it flows down into a take-in ball guide passage 108 or a return ball guide passage 109 described later.

  In the present embodiment, the case preparation members constituting the external shape of the preparation preparation sphere passage 110 and the acquisition device 100 are all formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. The pachinko sphere flowing down in the apparatus 100 is configured to be visible from the outside through the remaining sphere transparent window 130 formed on the upper surface of the operation table 4.

  Below the sprocket 106, it swings when the sorting solenoid 102 is excited or released, and the flow path of the pachinko sphere discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is either the take-in ball guide passage 108 or the return ball guide passage 109. A flow path switching valve 107 for switching to one side is provided.

  The flow path switching valve 107 is composed of two flow path switching valves 107 arranged in each of the two passages on the upstream side of the intake ball guiding path 108 and the return ball guiding path 109. The lower end of the flow path switching valve 107 is connected to the lower end of the link member 124 whose center is pivotally supported at the tip of the telescopic shaft 102a of the sorting solenoid 102, and is a swing shaft that extends in the horizontal direction over the two passages. 107a is fixed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the expansion and contraction shaft 102a expands and contracts by excitation or release of the sorting solenoid 102, so that the link member 124 rotates about the shaft portion and rotates the swing shaft 107a around the axis. Therefore, the flow path switching valve 107 swings around the swing shaft 107a. Further, since the telescopic shaft 102a of the sorting solenoid 102 is always urged in the extending direction by a coil spring (not shown) that is mounted around the telescopic shaft 102a in an unexcited state, the distal end of the telescopic shaft 102a. The flow path switching valve 107 connected to each other via the link member 124 is configured to remove the flow path of the pachinko balls taken in by the sprocket 106 when the sorting solenoid 102 is not excited (off state). It is always urged toward a position (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3) on the side of the ball guide passage 108.

  Further, the upper end of the link member 124 is when the pachinko ball flow path is switched to the return ball guiding passage 109, that is, when the flow path switching valve 107 is in the standing position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It is detected by a flow path detection switch 115 provided near the main body of the sorting solenoid 102. In this way, depending on the detection status of the link member 124 by the flow path detection switch 115, the flow path switching valve 107 determines whether the flow path of the pachinko sphere is on the intake ball guide path 108 side or the return ball guide path 109 side. That is, the actual flow path direction of the pachinko ball by the flow path switching valve 107 can be detected.

  An intake ball detection switch 105 is disposed below the flow path switching valve 107 and connected to the intake ball guiding passage 108, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106. Pachinko balls distributed to the incoming ball guide passage 108 are detected. On the other hand, a return ball detection switch 103 is arranged at a connection portion with the return ball guide passage 109, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 and is assigned to the return ball guide passage 109 side by the flow path switching valve 107. A sphere is detected.

  Next, when the take-in device 100 takes the pachinko ball guided from the upper plate 26 in order to set the bet number and discharges it to the game island without returning it to the player, the distribution solenoid 102 is excited. The state is stopped. In this state, since the flow path switching valve 107 is at the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 3, the pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is guided to the intake ball guide passage 108 side, and the intake ball detection switch 105 Is detected, and then flows down the take-in ball guiding passage 108 to the rear side of the slot machine 1 and is collected in an out ball tank inside the game island (not shown).

  When the pachinko ball on the upper plate 26 is discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25, the sorting solenoid 102 is in an excited state. In this state, the flow path switching valve 107 swings against the urging force of the coil spring to a position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 3, and the pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is returned to the return ball guiding path 109. Then, after being detected by the return ball detection switch 103, it flows down the return ball guide passage 109 and is discharged from the payout port 9 to the lower plate 25 and returned to the player. . The sorting solenoid 102 is in a state where excitation is stopped except when the pachinko ball of the upper plate 26 is discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25. That is, except for the case where the pachinko balls on the upper plate 26 are discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25, the flow path switching valve 107 is at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 3 and the flow of the pachinko balls discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 The road direction is on the side of the take-in ball guide passage 108.

  Further, a return ball clogging detection switch 111 (see FIGS. 1 and 4) for detecting clogging of the ball in the passage is provided at a position in the vicinity of the lower plate 25 in the return ball guiding passage 109. For example, the lower plate 25 Since the tank is full, it can be detected that the return ball guiding passage 109 is clogged with a ball.

  The lower part of the above-described take-in device 100, take-in preparation ball passage 110, ball removal passage 120, take-in ball guide passage 108, return ball guide passage 109, and payout ball guide passage 208 is the operation table 4 and the operation table. 4 is covered with a cover panel 4a (see FIG. 1) that forms a lower front surface, and in particular, a pachinko ball that has flowed into the take-in preparation ball passage 110 and the take-in device 100 cannot be taken out. In the vicinity of the upper position of the take-in device 100 on the upper surface of the operation table 4, the pachinko balls remaining in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 (in the take-in device 100), specifically, the ball removal lever 31 are operated. Even after the pachinko balls on the upper plate 26 are removed through the ball removal passage 120, the pachinko balls remain in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 and enter the inside of the cover panel 4a so that they can no longer be seen. A remaining spherical see-through window 130 is formed as a light-transmitting portion made of a transparent panel.

  As described above, since the take-up preparation ball passage 110 and the case cover of the take-in device 100 are formed of a transparent resin material, the player passes through the remaining ball see-through window 130 in the take-up preparation ball passage 110 ( Whether or not the pachinko balls remain in the capture device 100) can be visually confirmed from the outside of the slot machine 1. Therefore, the player can surely recognize when the pachinko ball remains in the capture preparation ball passage 110, so that the pachinko ball remains in the capture preparation ball passage 110. Regardless, it is possible to avoid the player from being disadvantaged by ending the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, in the main body frame 1b, a pachinko ball supplied from a game island or the like on which the slot machine 1 is installed is disposed above the upper plate 26 to the upper plate 26. Is provided. The pachinko balls paid out from the payout device 200 flow down the payout ball guide passage 208 extending downward from the payout device 200, and a communication port formed on the storage portion 26 a side in the upper plate 26. 13 is paid out to the upper plate 26. Further, the payout ball guide passage 208 is extended from the communication port 13 toward the lower plate 25 below, and surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 because the upper plate 26 is full are discharged ball guide passages 208. Is discharged from the discharge outlet 9 to the lower plate 25.

  The main body frame 1b faces the see-through window 3 of the front door 1c so that the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reels 2L, 2C and 2R described above are provided. A reel unit (not shown) comprising reel sensors 33 (see FIG. 4) each capable of detecting a reference position is provided, and a switch panel (not shown) facing the front door 1c is provided below the reel unit. Is provided. This switch panel includes a stop switch 36 for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. (Refer to FIG. 4), functioning as a setting key switch 37 (see FIG. 4) for switching to the setting change mode at startup, and as a reset switch for releasing the error state and the stop state except for the RAM abnormal error in the normal state. In the setting change mode, a reset / setting switch 38 (see FIG. 4) that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (payout rate) of internal lottery described later is provided. By opening the front door 1c, the stop switch 36, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 disposed on the switch panel can be operated from the front of the slot machine 1.

  A power supply unit (not shown) that houses a power supply board 75 to be described later is provided behind the switch panel, and a power switch 39 (shown in FIG. 4), and by opening the body frame 1b, the power switch 39 provided on the side surface of the power supply unit can be operated.

  The main body frame 1b includes a game control board 40 for controlling the game, a payout control board 60 for controlling the payout of pachinko balls, an effect control board 90 for controlling the effects, and driving of the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. A power supply board 75 that generates power and supplies the power to each unit is provided.

  Among these boards, the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed in one housing case 150 formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side. The effect control board 90 is disposed on the front door 1c side of the main body frame 1b, and the power board 75 is disposed between the housing case 150 and the switch panel described above while being housed in the power unit described above. Has been.

  The housing case 150 in which the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed is composed of a case body that can house the board and a case cover that can open and close the opening of the case body, although not particularly shown. A plurality of sealing pieces into which one-way screws (screws that can be rotated only in one direction by a screwdriver) are screwed are provided on the left and right sides of the case body and the case cover.

  The storage case 150 configured in this manner is configured such that, for example, one of the left and right sealing pieces of the case main body and the case cover is screwed into only one sealing piece on each of the left and right sides, and the tip of the one way screw is Further, by screwing into a mounting hole (not shown) formed on the back surface of the slot machine 1, the case cover is opened and the housing case 150 is opened unless the mounting-related portion related to the mounting of the sealing piece or the like is destroyed. So that the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are improperly modified or replaced with an illegal board. .

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko balls supplied to the slot machine 1 are stored in a supply tank 204 provided at the upper back of the main body frame 1b, and are passed through a ball supply passage 210 extending from the supply tank. It flows down and is supplied to the dispensing device 200. The ball supply passage 210 includes three passages (not shown), and the pachinko balls flowing out from the replenishing tank 204 are supplied to the dispensing device 200 in a state of being divided into the three passages. . A supply ball detection switch 205 is provided at a predetermined height position above the payout device 200 in the ball supply passage 210 in correspondence with each line, and the pachinko supplied to the payout device 200 by the supply ball detection switch 205. Whether or not the ball is waiting is detected. In the present embodiment, the supply ball detection switch 205 is a position where it is possible to detect that 75 balls, which is the maximum number of winning balls to be paid out by the payout device 200 when a winning is accompanied by paying out a prize ball, is supplied. The pachinko ball required for paying out the maximum number of winning balls is detected. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of balls taken in by the take-in device 100 is 15, and a maximum of 15 pachinko balls are paid out by the pay-out device 200 based on the operation of the checkout switch 10. The supply ball detection switch 205 detects whether or not a pachinko ball necessary for paying out the number of balls to be paid out is waiting based on the checkout switch 10. Furthermore, in this embodiment, lending of 25 balls is requested by a single lending request from the card unit 400. Even in this case, the supply ball detection switch 205 pays out the number of balls to be paid out based on the lending request. It is detected whether or not the pachinko balls necessary for the waiting are waiting.

  The payout device 200 is configured in substantially the same manner as the take-in device 100, although not particularly shown in detail, and is driven by a payout motor 201 (see FIG. 4) corresponding to each item of the ball supply passage 210. A rotating sprocket (not shown) is provided. Also, below the sprocket, a payout ball detection switch 202 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the passage of a pachinko ball discharged by the sprocket based on the payout of a prize ball or the like is provided. After the discharged pachinko ball is detected by the payout ball detection switch 202, it is discharged into the payout ball guide passage 208 extending from the lower part of the payout device 200.

  The payout ball guide passage 208 extends to the lower plate 25, and the pachinko balls discharged from the payout device 200 flow down the payout ball guide passage 208 and are discharged from the communication port 27 to the upper plate 26. The surplus sphere overflowing from 26 is paid out to the lower plate 25 from the payout opening 9. In addition, a payout ball clogging detection switch 112 (see FIGS. 1 and 4) for detecting a ball clogging in the passage is provided at a position in the vicinity of the lower plate 25 in the payout ball guiding passage 208. For example, the lower plate 25 Because of the full tank, it is possible to detect whether or not the payout ball guide passage 208 is clogged with a ball.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided in parallel with a card unit 400 that accepts a prepaid card in which a valuable value is recorded. From the card unit 400 based on the operation of the above-described ball rental switch 29, In response to this request, it is possible to lend a pachinko ball using the valuable value recorded on the prepaid card being accepted.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a bet number is set using the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26. Only a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state can be set as the bet number. In this embodiment, 3 is determined as the specified number of bets in the normal gaming state and RT described later. In the regular bonus, which will be described later, 1 is set. Therefore, when the gaming state is the regular bonus, only one bet can be set, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT. Only three bets can be set. In this embodiment, five pachinko balls are required to set the minimum unit bet number of 1, and one bet is set every time five pachinko balls are captured. .

  In order to set the bet number, the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. In this embodiment, when one ball take-in switch 5 is operated, one pachinko ball is taken in from the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26, and when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, it is stored in the upper plate 26. The number of pachinko balls necessary to set a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state at that time is taken in from the pachinko balls.

  In addition, the pachinko balls taken in by the take-in device 100 in order to set the bet number in accordance with the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 in this way are set in the take-in ball guide passage 108 as described above. It flows down, is taken into the inside of the slot machine 1, that is, the back side as seen from the side facing the player in the slot machine 1, and is discharged to the out ball tank provided inside the game island (not shown) as described above. The

  When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, the game can be started when a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set. For example, a range of the predetermined number determined according to the gaming state. It is also possible to set the bet number within the range, and at the time when at least one bet number is set, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated at a constant speed, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated in this state, the corresponding operation is performed. The rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of pachinko balls (principal balls) are paid out from the payout device 200 according to the wins, and the payout ball guide passage 208 is received. Is paid out directly to the upper plate 26 via the player and given to the player. In addition, when a combination of symbols with payout of pachinko balls is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the number of payout balls determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line And the total number of pachinko balls to be paid out will be paid out to the player. However, an upper limit (75 balls in this embodiment) is set for the number of pachinko balls to be paid out in one game. If the total number of payout balls exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of pachinko balls is set. Will be paid out. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, a payout control board 60, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 75. The game control board 40 mainly controls the game. The payout control board 60 controls the payout of the pachinko balls, the effect control board 90 controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and the power supply board 75 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. And supplied to each part.

  The power supply board 75 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the payout control board 60 and the effect control board 90 connected via. The power switch 39 is connected to the power board 75.

  On the game control board 40, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reel sensor 33, the stop switch 36, the setting key switch 37, Various switches such as a reset / setting switch 38, a take-in ball detection switch 105, a return ball detection switch 103, a return ball clogging detection switch 111, and a flow path detection switch 115 are connected, and via a payout control board 60. The aforementioned payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are connected, and detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the above-described captured / paid-off ball display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3BET LEDs 14-16, capture request LED 17, start valid LED 18, wait LED 19, and replaying. Electrical components such as LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, take-in motor 101, and sorting solenoid 102 are connected. These electric components are driven based on the control of a game control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 comprises a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The game control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 75 The reel motor drive circuit 45 that drives the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the take-in motor drive circuit 50 that drives the take-in motor 101, the solenoid drive circuit 46 that drives the sorting solenoid 102, and the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for driving various displays and LEDs connected to the slot, slot When the power supply voltage supplied to the thin 1 is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the game control unit 41, when the power is turned on or from the CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for providing a reset signal to the CPU 41a when an initialization command is not input for a certain period, and various other devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the game control unit 41.

  The game control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via these signal input terminals DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 0 to 3 can be executed, and a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA is provided for each interrupt. Can be selected and set in either an interrupt mode for generating an external interrupt in accordance with the timer mode or an interrupt mode for generating an internal interrupt in accordance with the number of clock inputs to the CPU 41a.

  In this embodiment, among interrupts 0 to 3, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupts 0 and 1 are set to the timer mode, and interrupt 3 is unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. In addition, the CPU 41a performs a time interval (this time) when the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 1 reaches the first specified number, that is, the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 1 reaches the first specified number. In the embodiment, an interrupt 1 is generated every approximately 0.56 ms) to execute a timer interrupt process (A) for detecting switches and controlling the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, etc. Each time the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 0 reaches the second specified number, that is, the time interval for the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 0 to reach the second specified number (in this embodiment, approximately 0 .4 ms), an interrupt 0 is generated and a timer interrupt process (B) for controlling the drive of the take-in motor 101 is executed. Moreover, although the interruption 3 is set to unused, the interruption 3 may generate | occur | produce with noise etc. For this reason, when the interrupt 3 occurs, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  In addition, the CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of an interrupt process based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 0 to 3, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, the priority is set to be executed in the order of interrupts 2, 1, 0, and 3. That is, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 1 and interrupt 0 or 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 1 is prioritized. When interrupt 0 and interrupt 3 occur at the same time, interrupt 0 is executed with priority.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of the interrupt process based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 0 to 3. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with a refresh register (not shown) for performing this refresh operation. The refresh register is composed of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  Further, the game control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (A) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 inputs / outputs various signals to / from the payout control board 60 via the I / O port 41d. The input / output of signals between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 will be described later.

  The payout control board 60 is connected to the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 described above, and the detection signals of these connected switches are input. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are branched on the payout control board 60 and also to the game control board 40. The detection signals of these switches are also input to the game control board 40.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are branched on the payout control board 60 and input to the game control board 40. Although the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are connected to the game control board 40, the transmission line of the detection signal is branched on the game control board 40. The game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 may be configured to input detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205. It may be possible to branch on a separately provided relay board and input to both the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60. .

  Further, the transmission lines of the detection signals of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 to the game control board 40 are used when the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 communicate with each other. It is connected to the game control board 40 through a single cable integrated together with the transmission line to be used, and the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the connector for connecting the cable and each board are also supplied. The detection signal transmission line of the ball detection switch 205 is shared by the transmission line used when the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 communicate with each other.

  Also, the payout control board 60 is connected to electrical components such as the payout motor 201 described above, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a payout control unit 61 (described later) mounted on the payout control board 60. It has become so.

  The payout control board 60 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 61a, a ROM 61b, a RAM 61c, and an I / O port 61d, similar to the game control part 41, and a payout control part 61 that controls the payout of pachinko balls. A switch detection circuit 62 that detects a detection signal input from a switch connected to the substrate 60, a payout motor drive circuit 63 that drives the payout motor 201, a display drive circuit 64 that drives various LEDs, etc. A reset circuit 65 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 61a when the initialization command from the CPU 61a is not input for a certain period, other circuits, and the like are mounted. The CPU 61a can output a signal output from the game control board 40 or a payout control. In response to a detection signal from a switch connected to the substrate 60, the pachinko ball is paid out. The payout control is performed, and the control of the control circuit mounted on the payout control board 60 is performed directly or directly while lending the pachinko ball according to the request from the card unit 400 connected via the connection terminal board 70. Control indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 61a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. The CPU 61a performs a timer interrupt process (payout) for generating a pachinko ball payout control or a lending control by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a fixed number, that is, every fixed time interval (about 2 ms). Execute. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 61a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the game control unit 41, the payout control unit 61 is not supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 61c is not held at the time of a power failure.

  The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front door 1c, an effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LEDs 55 that irradiate the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from behind. Electrical components are connected, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Like the game control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d. The effect control board 91 and the effect control board 90 control the effect. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 that controls the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 that controls the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls for performing the production, it is mounted on the production control board 90. Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit.

  As with the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interruption terminal (not shown) of the effect control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the game control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the CPU 91 a A command reception interrupt process for generating an interrupt based on the input and receiving a command transmitted from the game control unit 41 is executed. Further, the CPU 91a generates an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 1.12 ms), and executes a timer interruption process (effect) described later. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  In addition, the production control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Next, signals input / output in the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the card unit 400 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40 confirms the connection check between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 on the payout control board 60 side. To output a game control board connection confirmation signal. Then, the payout control unit 61 mounted on the payout control board 60 confirms the connection with the game control board 40 based on the detection of the game control board connection confirmation signal. In addition, the game control unit 41 gives the payout control board 60 a ball number signal indicating a value of 0 to 100 as the number of balls instructing payout by a settlement request or a payout request, Of the number of balls used and the number of used balls used to set the number of bets and the number of unused balls not yet used to set the number of bets) or a settlement request signal for requesting the settlement of the number of unused balls The payout request signal for requesting the payout of the prize ball is output. Then, when the payout control unit 61 detects the settlement request signal or the payout request signal, the payout control unit 61 performs payout control for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal at that time.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 61 makes a payout control board connection confirmation signal for checking the connection confirmation between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 on the game control board 40 side, the card unit 400 to the game control board 40. And an in-operation signal indicating the start, operation, and end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payment request or payout request. Then, the game control unit 41 confirms the connection with the payout control board 60 based on the detection of the payout control board connection confirmation signal, and connects the payout control board 60 and the card unit 400 based on the detection of the card unit connection signal. Based on the detection of the in-operation signal, the start, operation, and end of the pachinko ball payout operation by the payout control unit 61 are confirmed.

  The card unit 400 includes a control unit on which a microcomputer is mounted. As shown in FIG. 6, the remaining amount indicator 28 provided in the slot machine 1 is connected to the card unit 400 via a connection terminal plate 70, and the remaining amount is controlled by the microcomputer mounted on the control unit. The display 28 is driven. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the card unit 400 is connected to the above-described ball rental switch 29 and the return switch 30 provided in the slot machine 1 via a connection terminal plate 70, and detection signals of these switches are detected. Is input to the control unit.

  The card unit 400 also includes a card reader / writer that reads and writes the recorded information of the prepaid card inserted from the card insertion slot, and the card reader / writer stores the recorded information read from the prepaid card as a control unit. And the record information of the prepaid card inserted is updated based on a command from the control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the card unit 400 has a card unit connection signal (VL) indicating that the card unit 400 is normally connected to the payout control board 60 (the payout control unit 61) of the slot machine 1. The card unit READY signal (BRDY) indicating the start and end of the lending process by the card unit 400 and the lending request signal (BRQ) requesting the lending of the pachinko ball are output. The card unit connection signal is also a power source for communication between the control unit and the payout control board 60.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 60 (the payout control unit 61) has a slot machine READY signal (SRDY) indicating a state in which the pachinko ball can be lent to the card unit 400, and a pachinko ball based on BRQ. A lending completion signal (EXS) indicating the start and completion of lending operation is output.

  Further, as described above, the remaining amount indicator 28, the ball rental switch 29 and the return switch 30 mounted in the slot machine 1 are connected to the card unit 400, and the remaining amount indicator 28 is output based on the control of the control unit. The detection signal (lending operation detection signal) of the ball lending switch 29 and the detection signal (return operation detection signal) of the return switch 30 are input to the card unit 400. Then, the control unit mounted on the card unit 400 outputs the BRDY described above on condition that the valuable value read from the prepaid card being accepted remains as a result of the ball-lending switch 29 being detected. The above-mentioned BRQ is output, and the processing for requesting the lending unit for lending unit (25 balls in this embodiment) to the slot machine 1 is performed within the range of the remaining valuable value (in this embodiment, 10 times), and when the return switch 30 is detected, the prepaid card being accepted is returned.

  Next, the operation state of the slot machine 1 based on the control of the game control unit 41 and the payout control unit 61 described above will be described based on the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 7 shows that when a winning with payout of a winning ball occurs, when an operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where a captured ball remains, one or more bets are set and an unused ball is It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the state which remains.

  When a winning with payout of a winning ball occurs, when an operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where a captured ball remains, a bet number of 1 or more is set and an unused ball remains When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the game control unit 41 uses the value of the ball number signal to request the payout by the payout request (number of payout requests) or the number of balls to request the payout by the checkout request (settlement) The request number is updated to a value (tb1), and the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is turned on (tb2). Specifically, when a winning accompanied with a payout of a winning ball occurs, the value of the ball number signal is updated to a value indicating the number of winning balls given when the winning is generated, and the payout request signal is set to on. If the operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where the captured ball remains, that is, a state where a bet number of 1 or more is set or an unused ball remains, the value of the ball signal Is updated to a value indicating the acquired number of balls, which is the sum of the number of used balls and the number of unused balls used to set the number of bets, and the settlement request signal is turned on. Further, when an operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where one or more bets are set and an unused ball remains, the value of the ball number signal is updated to a value indicating the number of unused balls, The settlement request signal is turned on.

  When the payout control unit 61 detects that the payout request signal or the checkout request signal is on, the game control unit 41 is notified of the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the checkout request by turning on the operation signal (tb3). ). Then, a payout operation for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal is started (tb4), and when the payout operation is completed (tb5), the payout operation of the pachinko balls based on the payout request or the settlement request with the in-operation signal being turned off. Is notified to the game control unit 41 (tb6). Next, when the game control unit 41 detects the off-operation signal, it confirms the end of the payout operation, and sets the payout request signal or the settlement request signal to off (tb7). In addition, the game control unit 41 validates the detection of the payout ball by the payout ball detection switch 202 only during the period (tb3 to tb6) from when the on-operation signal is detected to when off is detected. Every time a payout ball is detected, the value of an unpaid ball counter (a counter that stores the number of payout balls that have not been paid out of the number of payout requests based on the payout request) set in the RAM 41c or an unsettled ball counter The value of (the counter that stores the number of unsettled spheres that have not been paid out of the number of settlement requests based on the settlement request) is subtracted and updated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of the pachinko balls changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, the power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and the data for destructive diagnosis (5A (H) in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. ing. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and is canceled until a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. There is nothing to do.

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the game in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number corresponding to the gaming state. And even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state, so that the progress of the game is disabled. It is like that. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  Further, the CPU 41a executes a set value determination process for determining whether or not a set value used for the internal lottery in the internal lottery process described later is an appropriate value.

  In the set value determination process, the set value determination process 1 for determining whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is within an appropriate range (1 to 6), the set value used for the internal lottery, and the setting set when the setting is changed Setting value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the setting value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match The set value determination process 3 to be determined is executed for each game.

  In the setting value determination process 1, when the setting value used for the internal lottery is not a value in the proper range, or in the setting value determination process 2, the setting value used for the internal lottery, the setting value set when the setting is changed, If the set values do not match or the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game does not match the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game in the set value determination process 3, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. The RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state to disable the progress of the game. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus, a normal gaming state, and an RT (replay time) as a gaming state. Among these, 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus. 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state and RT. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT, the betting number is set to 3. And the game can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the gaming status, but can be broadly divided into small roles with payout of pachinko balls (prize balls) and the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a re-playing role that can be started and a special role that accompanies the transition of the gaming state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 9 shows a winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the game control unit 41, and the combination number (1 to 17) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to the combination of combination and combination to be selected in the internal lottery. ) Is registered.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, special bonuses include big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, small roles such as cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell, JAC, Replay is defined as a re-playing role. In addition, combinations of the roles in the slot machine 1 include big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 ball (1), big bonus (2) +1 ball (1), Big bonus (1) +1 ball (2), big bonus (2) +1 ball (2), JAC + cherry, JAC + 1 ball (1), and JAC + 1 ball (2) are defined. That is, the total number of combinations of combinations and combinations is 17.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the combination and combination of combinations that are the objects of the lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT, or regular bonus. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT, whether or not any special role is being carried over (whether or not it is already set in the winning flag of the special role that any special role has been won) ) Also depends on the combination and combination of combinations that are subject to lottery. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when no special combination is carried over at RT, the state number is set. When “1” is set and any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “2” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over at RT “3” is set as the state number, and “4” is set as the state number in the case of a regular bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0” or “1”, the big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (1 ), Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 Ball (1), 1 Ball (2), Bell, ie, Roles with Role Numbers 1-14 The combination of the combination and the combination becomes the target of the internal lottery. When the game state is the normal game state or RT and any special role is carried over, that is, when “2” or “3” is set as the state number, replay, cherry, 1 The ball (1), the ball (2), the bell, that is, the combination of the combination of the combination numbers 10 to 14 is the target of the internal lottery. When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, when the state number is set to “4”, a bell, JAC + cherry, JAC + 1 ball (1), JAC + 1 ball (2), that is, a hand and a hand after the hand number 14 Are subject to internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the symbol “cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and 10 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. Since winning a cherry on the winning line, 20 pachinko balls (prize balls) will be paid out. One ball (1) is awarded when one of the winning lines has a combination of “blue 7-red 7-watermelon” in any gaming state, and one pachinko ball (prize ball) is paid out. . One ball (2) is awarded when a combination of “Red 7-Blue 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any game state, and one pachinko ball (prize ball) is paid out. . The bell is awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 75 pachinko balls are paid out. JAC is awarded only when the combination of “bell-bell-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the regular bonus, and one pachinko ball (prize ball) is paid out. In a game state other than the regular bonus, even if a combination of “bell-bell-replay” is arranged on any winning line, no winning is achieved.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the normal gaming state or RT, but in the regular bonus, even if this combination is aligned, no replay is awarded. When a replay is won, the pachinko ball (prize ball) will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game (regular bonus will not be replayed) Therefore, it is substantially the same as that 15 pachinko balls (prize balls) corresponding to 3) are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when the combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the normal gaming state or RT. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state or RT to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state or RT. . When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out to the player in the big bonus exceeds 2325 balls. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Further, the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the combination of the display results of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel becomes a combination that constitutes a chance chance described later in the normal gaming state, the special role (other special roles are carried over). (If not) and the small lottery probability is the same as in the normal gaming state, but shifts to a replay time (RT) where the winning probability of replay is high. While the gaming state is at RT, the RT flag is set in the RAM 41c. Then, the RT is terminated by reaching the prescribed game number (two games in the present embodiment) without winning any bonus or by winning any bonus before reaching the prescribed game number.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the gaming state is referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT and no special role is carried over, that is, when “0” or “1” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to, Numbers 1 to 14 and combinations of roles, that is, big bonus (1) [number 1], big bonus (2) [number 2], regular bonus [number 3], big bonus (1) + cherry [ Role number 4], Big bonus (2) + Cherry [Role number 5], Big bonus (1) + 1 ball (1) [Role number 6], Big bonus (2) + 1 ball (1) [Role number 7], Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2) [Role Number 8], Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (2) [Role Number 9], Replay [Role Number 10], Cherry [Role Number 11], 1 Ball (1 ) [Position number 12], 1 ball 2) [winning numbers 13, Bell [winning number 14 are sequentially read as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the game state is the normal game state or RT and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “2” or “3”, the winning combination table is referred to. Then, the combination of the combination of the combination numbers 10 to 14, that is, the replay [the combination number 10], cherry [the combination number 11], one ball (1) [the combination number 12], one ball (2) [the combination number 13] , [Bell number 14] are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “4” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of combinations of the combination numbers 14 to 17, that is, bell [port number 14] , JAC + cherry [role number 15], JAC + 1 ball (1) [role number 16], and JAC + 1 ball (2) [role number 17] are sequentially read out as target lotteries for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state are added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  Then, when winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be selected is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which a winning flag for a role is set. Specifically, when any of the roles (special roles) of the role numbers 1 to 3 is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the role numbers 4 to 9 (special role + general role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 10 to 14 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. In addition, when a combination of any of the combination numbers 15 to 17 (JAC (general combination) + general combination) is won, the general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is stored in the general combination respectively. Set to work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values for each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the game control unit 41.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role-specific table, as shown in FIG. 10, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 Ball (1), 1 Ball (2) The storage addresses of the number of determination values of Bell, JAC + Cherry, JAC + 1 ball (1), and JAC + 1 ball (2) are registered.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball ( 1) Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2) and Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (2) are the roles that are subject to internal lottery when no special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state or RT The storage addresses of the number of determination values corresponding to the state numbers 0 and 1 are registered. For the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value. Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2), Big For bonus (2) +1 ball (2), the common flag is 1, and a storage address for the number of common determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Replay is a role that is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether or not a special role is carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, and the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 2 (normal gaming state) , Storage addresses for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 1 and 3 (RT) are registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2) are the roles that are subject to internal lottery in the normal gaming state or RT, and state numbers 0 and 1 (the special role is not carried over in the normal gaming state or RT) And the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to the state numbers 2 and 3 (the special game state or the state where the special combination is carried over in the RT) are respectively registered. Yes. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The bell is a role that is subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state numbers 0 to 3 (game state other than the regular bonus), and the state number 4 (regular bonus) And the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to each are registered. The common flag for this combination is 0, and the storage address for the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value.

  JAC + Cherry, JAC + 1 ball (1), and JAC + 1 ball (2) are roles that are the targets of internal lottery only in the regular bonus. Yes. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  In addition, the number of payout balls of a pachinko ball (prize ball) to be paid out when winning each winning combination is also registered in the role-specific table. However, only the small role cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell, and JAC are the payout targets of the pachinko ball (prize ball) when winning. In addition, if “cherry” stops at the top or bottom of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two winning lines as described above. The total number of balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, the number of balls paid out for cherry (the number of prize balls) is 10, so 20 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out.

  The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus winning are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not subject to payout of a pachinko ball (prize ball). Replay does not involve paying out pachinko balls (prize balls), but it is not necessary to insert pachinko balls used for setting the number of bets in the next game (normally in the playing state). does not change.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. This storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the game control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, in the address ADD, in the gaming state with the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or the state in which no special combination is carried over in the RT, the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is This is an address that is referenced when the value is 1, and at this time, 15 that is the value stored here is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery target is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 2 to 6 in the gaming state of state numbers 0 and 1, respectively. It is. Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are referred to in the game state with state numbers 0 and 1 when the target part of the internal lottery is the big bonus (2) and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. Address. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively, in the gaming state of state numbers 0 and 1. is there.

  The big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) in the gaming state of the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, the normal gaming state or the state in which no special combination is carried over in the RT, are individually determined according to the set value. Since the number of values is stored and different numbers of determination values are stored, the winning probabilities of these combinations and combinations of combinations differ depending on the set values.

  On the other hand, for the regular bonuses in the gaming states of these state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or in the state where no special combination is carried over in RT, the number of judgment values is individually stored according to the set value. However, since the same number of determination values is stored, the regular bonus winning probability is the same for any set value.

  In addition, the address ADD + 36 is in the state number 0, 1 in the game state, that is, in the normal game state or the state where no special combination is carried over in the RT, and the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) + cherry The address ADD + 38 is the target of the internal lottery in the game state of the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal game state or in the state where no special role is carried over in the RT. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when the winning combination is a big bonus (2) + cherry. The address ADD + 40 is a game state of state numbers 0 and 1, that is, any special combination in the normal gaming state or RT. In the state that is not carried over, when the target part of the internal lottery is big bonus (1) + 1 ball (1) The address ADD + 42 is referred to regardless of the fixed value, and the address ADD + 42 is used for the internal lottery in the game state of the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal game state or the state where no special combination is carried over in the RT. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when it is a big bonus (2) +1 ball (1), and the address ADD + 44 is a special game state of state numbers 0 and 1, that is, any special game state or RT. In a state where no combination is carried over, when the target combination of the internal lottery is a big bonus (1) +1 ball (2), it is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value, and the address ADD + 46 is a state number 0, In one gaming state, that is, a normal gaming state or a gaming state in which no special role is carried over in RT, an internal lottery Elephants combination is an address to be referred to regardless of the setting value when a big bonus (2) +1 balls (2).

  The address ADD + 48 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 or 2, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the target character of the internal lottery is replay. The address ADD + 50 is an address that is referenced regardless of the set value when the state number is 1 or 3, that is, in RT, when the target combination of the internal lottery is replay.

  The address ADD + 52 is referred to regardless of the set value when the target number of the internal lottery is cherry in the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or the state in which no special combination is carried over in RT. Address. The address ADD + 54 is referenced regardless of the set value when the state number is 2 or 3, that is, in the normal gaming state or in the state where any special combination is carried over in RT, and the target combination of the internal lottery is cherry Address.

  The address ADD + 56 is related to the set value when the target number of the internal lottery is one ball (1) in the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or the state where no special combination is carried over in the RT. This address is referred to without The address ADD + 58 is set to the set value when the state number is 2 or 3, that is, in the state where any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, and the target combination of the internal lottery is one ball (1). Regardless of the address that is referenced.

  The address ADD + 60 is related to the set value when the target number of the internal lottery is one ball (2) in the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or the state where no special combination is carried over in the RT. This address is referred to without The address ADD + 62 is set to the set value when the state number is 2 or 3, that is, in the state where any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, and the target combination of the internal lottery is one ball (2). Regardless of the address that is referenced.

  Addresses ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, ADD + 72, and ADD + 74 are in the state numbers 0 to 3, that is, in the normal gaming state or RT, when the target role of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. The address to be referenced. Addresses ADD + 76, ADD + 78, ADD + 80, ADD + 82, ADD + 84, and ADD + 86 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 4, that is, regular bonus. It is. Regarding the bell in the gaming state of state number 4, the number of determination values is stored individually according to the set value, but the number of determination values of setting values 1 and 2, the number of determination values of 3 and 4, 5 and 6 Since the common determination value number is stored in each of the determination value numbers, the winning probabilities of the setting values 1 and 2 are the same, the winning probabilities of the 3 and 4 are common.

  The address ADD + 88 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 4, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target part of the internal lottery is JAC + Cherry. The address ADD + 90 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 4, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target character of the internal lottery is JAC + 1 ball (1). The address ADD + 92 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 4, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target character of the internal lottery is JAC + 1 ball (2).

  FIGS. 12A, 12B, and 13A to 13C are diagrams showing examples of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination, and the winning combination. is there. In FIG. 12 (a), when no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, in FIG. 12 (b), when no special role is carried over at RT, the normal game is shown in FIG. 13 (a). An example when any special combination is carried over in the state, when any special combination is carried over in RT in FIG. 13 (b), and in the regular bonus in FIG. 13 (c) Each is shown. FIGS. 12A and 12B and FIGS. 13A to 13C show examples where the set value is 6. FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and Bell are subject to internal lottery. In the set value 6, the number of determination values of each combination is 20, 20, 31, 10 10, 5, 5, 5, 5, 2245, 76, 153, 153, 2082. The big bonus (1), which is the target of the internal lottery, is the result of adding the judgment value number of 20 and the result of addition overflows when 16364 to 16383 are acquired as random numbers for the internal lottery. Become.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 40, which is the sum of the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16344 to 16363, which will overflow, are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, the regular bonus is a big bonus when 16313 to 16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the big bonus (1) + cherry is a big bonus when 16303 to 1631 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + Cherry is obtained when 16293-16302 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) +1 ball (1) is acquired when 16288-16292 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery When the big bonus (2) +1 ball (1) is acquired as random numbers for internal lottery 16283-16287, the big bonus (1) +1 ball (2) is random numbers for internal lottery 16278-16282 When obtained as a big bonus (2) + 1 ball (2), 16273 to 16277 are random numbers for internal lottery The replay is obtained when one of 14028 to 16272 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, and when the cherry is obtained from 13952 to 14027 as a random number for internal lottery, one ball (1 ) When 13799-13951 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, 1 ball (2) is acquired when 13646-13798 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. When it is acquired as a random number for lottery, it is determined that each is a win. When 0 to 11563 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (2), Replay , Cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 528.5, 1/1638, 1/1638, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1 / 7.3, 1 / 215.6, 1 / 107.1, 1 / 107.1, and 1 / 7.87.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12B, when no special role is carried over in RT, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (2 ), Replay, Cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and Bell are subject to internal lottery, and in the setting value 6, the number of determination values of each combination is 20, 20, 31, 10, 10 5, 5, 5, 5, 12245, 76, 153, 153, 2082, 16364-16383, 16344-16363, 16313-16343, 16303-1631, When 6293-16302, 16288-16292, 16283-16287, 16278-16282, 16273-16277, 4028-16272, 3952-4027, 3799-3951, 3646-3798, 1564-3645 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery Each is determined to be a winner. Also, the approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 528.5, 1/1638, 1/1638, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1 / 1.34, 1 / 215.6, 1 / 107.1, 1 / 107.1, 1 / 7.87. When 0 to 1563 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13A, when any special role is carried over in the normal game state, only replay, cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and bell are inside. Since the number of determination values for each combination is 2245, 96, 163, 163, 2082 at the set value 6 in the set value 6, 14139-16383, 14043-14138, 13880-14042, 13717-13879, 11635 When ˜13716 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, each is determined to be a winner. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 7.3, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87. When 0-11634 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13B, when any special role is carried over in RT, only replay, cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and bell are in the internal lottery. Since the number of determination values of each combination is 12245, 96, 163, 163, 2082 at the setting value 6, 4139-16383, 4043-4138, 3880-4042, 3717-3879, 1635-3716 Is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, each is determined to be a win. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1.34, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87. When 0 to 1634 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13C, in the regular bonus, bell, JAC + cherry, JAC + 1 ball (1), JAC + 1 ball (2) are subject to internal lottery. Since the number of determination values is 15919, 96, 163, and 163, when 465 to 16383, 369 to 464, 206 to 368, and 43 to 205 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, they are determined to be winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 1.03, 1/17: 00, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 100.5. When 0 to 42 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the table index contains table creation data from the reference address (table_index) when referring to the table index for each winning flag setting state (hereinafter referred to as an internal winning state) by internal lottery. Differences up to the address where the index data indicating the head address of the stored area is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  Specifically, lose, cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell, replay, big bonus (1) (+ lose), big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (1) + 1 ball (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay, Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + 1 ball (1), Big bonus (2) + 1 ball (2), Big bonus (2) + Bell, Big bonus (2) + Replay, Regular bonus (+ Loss), Regular bonus + Cherry, Regular Bonus + 1 ball (1), Regular bonus + 1 ball (2), Regular bonus + Bell, Regular bonus + Replay, JAC + Cherry, JAC + Sphere (1), for each of the JAC + 1 ball (2), the index data indicating the leading address of the area table created for data is stored is stored. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, if the same control is applied (for example, big bonus (1) + replay winning, big bonus (2) + replay winning, regular bonus + replay winning In the case of applying the same control, etc., the same address is stored as index data. In such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Will be.

  The table creation data is composed of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to in accordance with the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referenced according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may vary depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, the address of the number of frames to be drawn to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and based on the top address of the table creation data , It is possible to specify the address of the number of frame data to be referred to according to each situation, and it is necessary according to each situation from this identified address. It has to be able to identify the lead-frame number data. Even if the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address for the number of drawn frames when the same number of drawn frames is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of drawn frames is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIG. 15, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined with respect to one reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 from the position are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data as described above corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number corresponds to the stop reference position (this In the embodiment, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed at the timing (the timing at which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) positioned in the fluoroscopic window 3 lower symbol area). It is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn when detected is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. Acquires the address of the data for the number of drawn frames corresponding to each reel corresponding to the rotating state of the reel, and develops the data for the number of drawn frames for each reel stored at the acquired address to create a stop control table for all the reels. .

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stopped frame and the number of pull-in number data of the unstopped reel corresponding to the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained. The number-of-drawing frame number data stored in each reel is expanded to create a stop control table for unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number corresponding to the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. It stops at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3).

  Further, in the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state. Further, one table creation data includes one address. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, data for table creation corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and number-of-drawing frame data corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined, The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  Also, in the table index, the number of frames to be drawn in to the address corresponding to the case where one of the winning combinations is won, with the winning combination being drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames, so that the winning combination is not aligned For creating a table with the number of frames to be drawn in, so that the index data for identifying the table creation data for which is defined is stored, and the address corresponding to the case where the winning is lost is not included in any role Stores index data for specifying data. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. The reel stop control is performed, and if no winning combination is selected, a stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn that does not have any winning combination is determined, and the reel stop control is performed. Done. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align them and stop. The symbol of the winning combination will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  Also, in the table index, the address corresponding to the case where a small role is elected with a special role carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, etc.) The number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the selected special role can be drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the stoppage position where the selected special role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames is selected. The index data for specifying the data for creating the table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the number of frames is drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames is stored, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to stop them together. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  Also, in the table index, when the re-game player is elected in the state where the special game has been carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Replay, etc.), the re-game player has 4 frames. Index data for specifying data for creating a table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within a range is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  Also, in the table index, when JAC + other small roles are elected (JAC + Cherry, JAC + 1 ball (1), JAC + 1 ball (2)), the address corresponding to JAC ("bell-bell-replay" combination) The index data for specifying the data for creating the table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the number of frames is drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames is stored, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the JAC symbols are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “bell” which is a symbol constituting the JAC in the left and middle reels and “replay” which is a symbol constituting the JAC in the right reel are 5 in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. It is arranged within the design, that is, within 4 frames, and can be stopped at any position within the drawing range of 4 frames, so if JAC + other small roles are elected, a stop switch by the player Regardless of the operation timing of 8L, 8C, and 8R, JACs will always win together. That is, in such a case, control for aligning the JAC on the winning line is prioritized over the cherry, one ball (1), and one ball (2), and the JAC always wins.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8, “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and 4 frames are drawn in. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flag for the bell and the replay is set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  In addition, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Replay” symbol will be used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table for drawing on L2 or L5 is created, and when the “replay” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L2 or L5 for the middle reel or the right reel, the stop control table for the left reel is 5 The “replay” symbol of the number, that is, when the symbol is stopped on the winning line L2 or L5, the “replay” symbol excluding the “replay” symbol that also stops the “cherry” on the winning line L1. A stop control table is created to draw on the winning line L2 or L5, and the middle reel and right reel are moved from the left reel. When stopped first, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5, and when the left reel is stopped thereafter, the “replay” symbol other than No. 5 is always placed on the winning line L2 or L5. Therefore, for example, when the “replay” symbol No. 5 stops on the winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel and the right reel, the replay and the cherry are not won simultaneously. In the left reel, the 2nd “Replay” design and the 7th “Replay” design are arranged within 4 frames, so even if control is performed to avoid the 5th “Replay” design, Regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, the replay can always be won. If the left reel is stopped while all the reels are still rotating when the replay winning flag is set, except for the case where the replay and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “replay” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is stopped first, control is performed so that the combination of “replay” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  In addition, when the winning flag for the bell is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “bell” symbol is always used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table is drawn in on L1, and when the “bell” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L1 of the middle reel or the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as the stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table for drawing on the winning line L1 in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, Thereafter, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” symbol is always drawn on the winning line L1. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged continuously. For this reason, the bell can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, and the bell and the cherry are not simultaneously won. If the left reel is stopped while all the reels are still rotating when the bell winning flag is set, except for the case where the bell and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “bell” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that the combination of “bells” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. The chance in the present embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state or when one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won. Furthermore, as described above, it is also a display mode that shifts to RT by being derived in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the display result of the left reel is “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols or “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols, "Blue 7 Watermelon" is stopped, and all the roles are not aligned on the winning line. As a result of displaying the middle reel, "Cherry Replay Cherry", No. 11, No. 13, No. 21, No. 1, The symbol “Cherry Bell Cherry” stops, and the display mode in which all the roles are not aligned on the winning line, and the display result of the right reel, “Replay Cherry Blue 7” of the symbols 10-12 are stopped. However, a display mode in which none of the combinations are arranged on the winning line is applied as an opportunity.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state. As a result of the display on the left reel, the display mode in which “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16-18 is stopped is the reach of all bonuses, and symbols 20, 20, 1, 1 or 12-14 The display mode in which the symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” has stopped and none of the roles are on the winning line is applied as the reach of the big bonus (1) or regular bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when one ball (1), one ball (2) is won, each reel 2L, 2C, 2R Regardless of the order in which the stop operations are performed, it is controlled so that chances can be derived, and when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is Regardless of the order in which they are performed, the reach is controlled so that it can be derived, provided that each reel is stopped in an order that satisfies a specific condition (eg, left, middle, right). It may be possible to derive the chance eyes and reach eyes.

  Here, an example of reel stop control when the chance eyes and reach eyes are derived will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15 shows a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), and one ball (1) is won without any bonus being carried over (one ball (1)). If one ball (2) is elected with no bonuses carried over (1 ball (2)), if a cherry is elected without any bonus carried over (cherries), If the Big Bonus (1) or Regular Bonus is won and no other character is selected (BB (1) RB), the Big Bonus (2) is selected and no other character is selected It is a figure which shows the stop control table of the left reel produced in the case (BB (2)).

  First, in a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a stop control table corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 15 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. In this stop control table, “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 for all area numbers, “bell / red 7 bell” of symbols 8 to 10 and “ "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon", 12-14 design "Replay Watermelon Bell", 16-18 design "Blue 7 Watermelon Blue 7", 20, 21, 1 design "Replay The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than “watermelon bell” is specified is determined, and 2 to 4 are display results that constitute a chance eye when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any timing. In the display results that comprise the "Replay Watermelon Bell" of the number 8 symbol, the "Bell Red 7 Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbol, and the "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon" of the 15th to 17th symbol There is a 12-14 pattern "Replay Watermelon Bell" No. 6-18 symbols “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7”, 20, 21, No. 1 symbol “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” will not be derived as a display result and will eventually be a chance or reach Does not hold.

  When one ball (1) is won in a state where no bonus has been carried over in the normal game state (1 ball (1)), one ball (1) in FIG. 15 is used as the stop control table for the left reel. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, display results for “blue 7” constituting a combination of one ball (1) to stop on any pay line for the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 are specified. The number of drawn frames is determined. Particularly, for the area numbers 18 and 19, the number of drawn frames for specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 4 to 8, and “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 is specified for the region numbers 10 to 14. The number of drawn-in frames is determined, and the number of drawn-in frames in which display results other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the chance and reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21, that is, the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at a possible timing, a display result in which the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 18 and 19 among the timings at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 15th to 17th symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” are derived, and if the combination of 1 ball (1) is not aligned on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 8 among the timings at which the “blue 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result, and a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 10 to 14, “bell bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is detected. “Red 7 Bell” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation was detected at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one ball (1) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of pull-in frames specifying “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Blue 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the ball (1) is elected, a higher rate than the display result in which “blue 7” constituting the combination of one ball (1) stops on any winning line is derived, Chance eyes Among the displayed results, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one ball (1) cannot be won. "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" will be derived.

  When one ball (2) is won in a state where no bonus is carried over in the normal gaming state (1 ball (2)), one ball (2 in FIG. 15) is used as the stop control table for the left reel. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In the stop control table, for the region numbers 9 to 15, the number of lead-in frames for specifying the display result that “red 7” constituting the combination of one ball (2) stops on any pay line is specified. In particular, for the area numbers 12 and 13, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are specified is determined. In addition, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 6 to 8, and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 is specified for the region numbers 17 to 21. The number of drawn-in frames is determined, and the number of drawn-in frames in which display results other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the chance and reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timing of the area numbers 9 to 15, that is, the timing at which the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected, a display result in which the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (2) stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 12 and 13 among the timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn in a range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are derived, and if the combination of one ball (2) is not aligned on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When the “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 17 to 21, “replay “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation was detected at a timing when the “red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, when one ball (2) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn to identify “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Red 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the ball (2) is elected, a higher rate than the display result in which “red 7” constituting the combination of one ball (2) stops on any winning line is derived, Chan Among the display results constituting the eyes, “Replay Watermelon Bell” and 15-17 of symbols 2 to 4 derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (2) cannot be won. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” will be derived.

  When the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, BB (1) RB (1) of FIG. 15 is used as a stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table corresponding to the item is created. In the stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols is specified for the area numbers 6 to 8 is determined. Number of drawing frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the design symbol is specified is determined, and for the area number 17, 20, 21, the number of drawing frames in which “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the design is specified The number of frames to be drawn that specifies the “replay watermelon bell” of the 12th to 14th symbols for the area number 16 is determined, and the “replay / blue” of the 15th to 17th symbols for the area number 17 “7. Watermelon” is specified, and the number of drawn frames is specified for area numbers 18 and 19, and “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” is specified for symbols 16-18. For other area numbers. Number pull frames are determined eye display result other than the display results and a display mode which constitutes a is specified.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and finally on the winning line Since there will be no winning combination, a chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as the display result, and finally the big on the winning line If the combination of bonus (1) is not complete, no other combination will be lined up on the winning line, and the chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and the winning combination is finally placed on the winning line. Since there is no match, chances will be established.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 16, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 12 to 14 is derived as the display result, and at the timing of the area number 1, the left reel is When a stop operation is detected, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 20, 21, No. 1 is derived as a display result, and in any case, no winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Therefore, a reach that can appear only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus (1) is won is established. The 16th to 18th symbols “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” are derived as the display result, and the reach that is common to all bonuses is established.

  When the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the stop control corresponding to the item of BB (2) in FIG. A table is created. In this stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4 is specified for the area numbers 4-7 is determined, and 8-10 for the area numbers 12-14. The number of drawn frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the number symbol is specified is determined, and the number of drawn frames in which “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the number 15 to 17 is identified for the area number 17 The number of frames to be drawn in which “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 is specified for the area numbers 19 to 21 is determined. The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than the display result including the display mode constituting the eye is specified is determined.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and the region numbers 12 to 14 When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of, the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is derived as the display result, and the winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Since there is no chance, a chance will be established. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and finally a big is displayed on the winning line. If the combination of bonuses (2) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, and a chance will be established. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19 to 21, “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is derived as a display result and is common to all bonuses. The reach will be established.

  As described above, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, No. of No. 8-10 A stop control table that can specify “bell / red 7 / bell”, “replay / blue 7 / watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one ball (1) cannot be won among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “bell, red 7 and bell” of symbols 8 to 10 can be specified as display results, and constitute a combination of one ball (1). Stop control table that can specify “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line. Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one ball (2) cannot be won among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 as the display result, which constitutes a combination of one ball (2). Stop control table that can specify “bell, red 7, bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or when only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, or in the normal gaming state In this case, when only one ball (2) is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chances can be derived. In particular, when only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) cannot be stopped on the winning line, 2-4 It is possible to derive “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 as the display results, and “Blue 7” constituting a combination of one ball (1) When the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it becomes possible to derive “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 15 to 17 as the display result, and only one ball (2) in the normal gaming state When winning, if the “Red 7” symbols that make up one ball (2) cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Replay Watermelon Bell”, 17th pattern “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” can be derived as a display result, and the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) can be stopped on the winning line. The symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” can be derived as a display result.

  In addition, when any of the roles is not won in the normal gaming state, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols A stop control table that can specify display results other than “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. Thus, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table that does not derive a chance.

  Also, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state In the case where only one ball (2) is elected, “Replay Watermelon” of symbols 2 to 4 constituting the chance eye when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, and 13・ "Bell" or 8-10 symbols "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" are derived as display results, but if no role is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the area number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2-4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8-10 are displayed as display results Derived Rukoto is not. That is, when the bonus or one ball (1) and one ball (2) are won, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the stop operation of the left reel at the above timing. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the left reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  At the start of reel rotation, the above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a stop control table for the left reel, and any one of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped. Even if both the middle reel and the right reel are stopped, if the symbols that make up the winning combination are on the winning line, The above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a left reel stop control table, except in the case where there is a possibility of the occurrence of a failure. In other words, when the left reel is stopped first, or when it is stopped second or third, the combination of symbols that make up the winning bonus is on the winning line of the already stopped reel Or, if there is a possibility that an unwinned role may win from the display result of the reels that have already been stopped, 1 ball (1) or 1 ball (2) will be won in the normal gaming state, If any bonus is won, reel stop control will be performed based on the stop control table from which chance chances can be derived. If no part is won, chances will not be derived. The reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table.

  In addition, for the middle reel and the right reel, stop control that can derive a chance when one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won in a normal gaming state or one of the bonuses is won. Stop control is performed based on the table.

  Although not specifically shown, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is Creates a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn that specifies the display result that constitutes the chance eye, as a stop control table for the middle reel, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel in the still rotating state In the state where at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel, the chance reel is configured as the stop control table for the right reel. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result to be specified is specified is created.

  Further, when only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one ball on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (1) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is determined as the stop control table for the middle reel. The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes one ball (1) combination on the winning line of the left reel stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “red 7” symbol that forms a combination of one ball (1) on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  Further, when only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one ball on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) is stopped, one ball is placed on the winning line where the “blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel as a stop control table for the middle reel. A winning line in which the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel for the area where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of drawn frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of drawn frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the stop control table for the middle reel Is generated.

  Further, when only one ball (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one ball on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is defined as the stop control table for the middle reel The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one ball (2) on the winning line of the left reel stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Blue 7” symbol that forms a combination of one ball (2) on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  Further, when only one ball (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one ball on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) is stopped, one ball is placed on the winning line where the “red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel as a stop control table for the middle reel. A winning line in which the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped in the area where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of drawn frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of drawn frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the middle reel stop control table Is generated.

  On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state, the display constituting the chance eye is used as the stop control table for the middle reel or the right reel regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table in which the number of drawn frames other than the result is determined is created.

  Specifically, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the state, in the stop control table for the middle reel created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels, the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers is displayed. 11, 21, 1, 2, “Cherry Bell Cherry” is specified, and when a middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of these area numbers, 11-13 One of the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 21, 1, 2 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result. So it will not be aligned with the winning combination on to the winning line, so that the chance eyes is established.

  In the normal gaming state, when any of the bonuses is won and no other combination is won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the right reel created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 10th to 12th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers is displayed. When the number of drawn frames to be specified is determined and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” of symbols 10 to 12 is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  When only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one ball (1) on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel created when the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of) is not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ When the number of frames to be drawn that identifies “Replay Cherry”, 21st, 1st, 2nd “Cherry Bell Cherry” is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers One of the 11th to 13th symbols "Cherry Replay Cherry", 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols "Cherry Bell Cherry" is derived as a display result, and finally the winning la Since the winning combination will not be aligned on emissions, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one ball (1) on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination is stopped, one ball is placed on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One ball on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel against the area number where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result indicating that the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) stops is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left reel The “Blue 7” symbol has stopped On the prize line, 1 ball (1) "red 7" combination constitute the symbol is displayed to stop result is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “red 7” symbol on the winning line where the “blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn that specifies “Cherry / Replay / Cherry” of No. 11-13 and “Cherry Bell / Cherry” of No. 21, 1, and 2 is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any one of the 11th to 13th symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry” and the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  That is, when only one ball (1) is elected, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and one ball (1) is placed on the winning line of the left reel. When the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the area number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the area number for identifying the display result constituting the combination of one ball (1) are A different stop control table is created.

  When only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one right ball (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one ball on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of 1) are not stopped, the “10” to “12” symbols described above for at least one area number are used. If the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, Blue 7 "is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and at least one ball (2 on the winning line of the left reel is still rotating). In the middle reel stop control table created when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of) are not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ When the number of frames to be drawn that identifies “Replay Cherry”, 21st, 1st, 2nd “Cherry Bell Cherry” is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers One of the 11th to 13th symbols "Cherry Replay Cherry", 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols "Cherry Bell Cherry" is derived as a display result, and finally the winning la Since the winning combination will not be aligned on emissions, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and at least one ball (2 on the winning line of the left reel is still rotating). In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination is stopped, one ball is placed on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One ball on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel against the area number where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result of “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left reel "Red 7" symbol is stopped On prize line, 1 ball (2) "Blue 7" display result symbol stops constituting a combination of is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “blue 7” symbol on the winning line where the “red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn that specifies “Cherry Replay Cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols, “Cherry Bell Cherry” of the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any one of the 11th to 13th symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry” and the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  In other words, if only one ball (2) is elected, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the area number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the area number for identifying the display result constituting the combination of one ball (2) are A different stop control table is created.

  When only one ball (2) is elected in the normal game state, at least one ball (2) on the winning line of the left reel with at least the left reel already stopped and the right reel still rotating ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one ball on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of 2) are not stopped, “10” to “12” of the above-mentioned “No. If the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, the “Replay / Cherry” symbols of No. 10 to 12 are displayed. Blue 7 "is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  The middle reel stop control table created when none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state shows the numbers 11 to 13 for any area number regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels. The number of draw-in frames for which display results other than the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 21st, 1st and 2nd “Cherry Bell Cherry” are specified is determined. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created when not selected, a pull-in frame that specifies a display result other than “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” for symbols 10 to 12 for any area number. Since the number is fixed, there is no chance that the chance will be finalized.

  In addition, when any bonus is won in the normal game state and any other combination is not won, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the case of only one ball (1) or one ball (2) winning in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel has already stopped and the middle reel is still In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created in the rotating state, the “cherry replay cherry” of No. 11 to No. 13 mentioned above for the specific area number, No. 21, No. 1, No. 2, respectively. It is created when the number of draws that specify “Cherry Bell Cherry” in the design is fixed, but none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state In the stop control table of the middle reel, displays other than the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols and the “cherry bell cherry” of the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols for the specific area number described above. The number of incoming frames for which the result is specified is determined. For this reason, when a bonus or one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won, the middle reel stop operation is performed at the timing of a specific area number, and the display result constituting the chance eye On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the middle reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  In addition, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. When the right reel stop control table is created in the normal game state and only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is elected, at least one of the reels has already stopped. In the right reel stop control table created when the right reel is still rotating, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 10th to 12th symbols described above with respect to the specific area number are used. The number of draws to be specified is determined, whereas in the normal gaming state, when any combination is not won, and at least one of the reels In the right reel stop control table created when the right reel is still rotating, the “replay cherry” of the 10th to 12th symbols for the specific area number described above is used.・ The number of frames to be drawn that specifies the display result other than Blue 7 is specified. For this reason, when a bonus or one ball (1) and one ball (2) are won, a display operation that constitutes a chance eye is performed by stopping the right reel at the timing of a specific area number. In contrast, if no winning combination is won, even if the right reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  Next, the symbol arrangement on the left reel will be described with reference to FIG. 8. The 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (1), the regular bonus, and one ball (2) is the upper stage of the left reel, Display modes (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stop at either the middle or lower level, the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one ball (1) Nos. 16 and 18 The display mode (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) in which the “Blue 7” symbol of the number stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel Each is arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 9 to 13) in which the 9th “red 7” symbol can be drawn on up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line, You can draw the 16th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line, or you can draw the 18th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be played, the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line I can't do that either. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. The Big Bonus (1), Regular Bonus (1), 1 ball (1 ball) in the position where the “Red 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing of the range that can be pulled in Since the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 2) and the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and one ball (1) are arranged respectively, the “red 7” symbol is arranged. "There is no stop operation position that can aim at the" blue 7 "symbol at the same time.

  In other words, in the left reel stop control table created when the big bonus (2) or one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the “Blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line. Created when the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames to draw the display mode to be determined and the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, 1 ball (2) are won in the normal gaming state. In the stop control table of the left reel, the “red 7” symbol is different from the region numbers 9 to 15 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “red 7” symbol stops on any pay line is different. There is no stop operation position at which the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, the 6th “cherry” symbol that constitutes a combination of cherries from which more pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out than one ball (1) in the normal gaming state is on the upper, middle or lower tier of the left reel. The display mode to stop (area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbol that constitutes a combination of one ball (1) are the upper, middle, The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) that stops at any of the lower tiers is arranged beyond the 4 frames that are the maximum pull-in range, respectively. .

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 15, the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) where the 6th “cherry” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any of the winning lines. If done, draw up to 4 frames of the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design and stop it on one of the winning lines, or place the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be pulled in and stopped on any of the winning lines, the “Cherry” symbol of No. 6 is a maximum of 4 frames. It cannot be pulled in and stopped on any winning line. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. There are more pachinko balls (award) than 1 ball (1) in the normal gaming state at a position where the “cherry” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range that can be drawn into Since the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the combination of cherries from which the ball (ball) is paid out and the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) are arranged, the “Cherry” symbol and There is no stop operation position at which the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In other words, in the stop control table for the left reel created when the cherry is elected in the normal gaming state, the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “cherry” symbol stops on one of the winning lines is determined. In the stop control table for the left reel created when the area numbers 6 to 12 and one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the display indicating that the “blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line Since the region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames into which the mode is drawn are different are different, there is no stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  On the other hand, the display pattern (area number 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and chance chance that the 6th “cherry” symbol stops at the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel The “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are arranged within the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) in which the number of draw-in frames for drawing the 6th “cherry” symbol up to 4 frames and stopping them on any winning line is determined, and The number of draws that will stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” will be determined. Since the stop operation positions (region numbers 4 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 14) partially overlap, the stop operation positions (region numbers 6 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 12) are stopped. If an operation is made, if the cherries are won, the 6th “cherry” symbol will stop on one of the winning lines, and if one ball (1) is won, a chance will be formed "Replay watermelon bell" of No. 2-4, 8 ~ "Bell red 7 Bell" of the No. 0 pattern is to be stopped.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a continues to rotate the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected yet until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, the control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  The CPU 41a according to the present embodiment performs an abnormal winning determination that determines whether or not a combination that is not permitted in the game is aligned on the winning line when all the reels are stopped. When a combination that is not permitted in the game is arranged on the winning line, the game is controlled to an abnormal winning error state to disable the progress of the game. The abnormal winning error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, as in the case of the RAM abnormal error described above, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until it is set.

  The abnormal winning determination will be described. First, the CPU 41a sets a winning flag indicating a winning combination allowed in the game at the time of the internal lottery in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and all reels are set. A winning symbol flag that indicates a combination that is on the winning line at the time of stopping is set. An abnormal winning determination flag is created from the winning flag, and it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the generated abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag.

  The winning flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning combination is 1, This indicates that the winning of the winning combination is allowed. When the winning is 0, it indicates that the winning of the winning combination is not allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus, the 10th bit corresponds to the replay, the 11th bit. The bit corresponds to JAC, the twelfth bit corresponds to one ball (1), the thirteenth bit corresponds to one ball (2), the fourteenth bit corresponds to bell, and the fifteenth bit corresponds to cherry. The third to ninth bits do not correspond to any combination.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of winning combinations may be permitted in one game. In this case, the value of each bit corresponding to the permitted winning combination is set to 1 in the winning flag. It has become.

  The abnormal winning determination flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, but the bit value individually determined for each winning combination is 0. In some cases, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted, and in the case of 1, it indicates that the winning of the combination is not permitted. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag is a value obtained by inverting 0 and 1 of the winning flag.

  The winning symbol flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating the winning combination on the winning line, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning is 1, Indicates that a prize has been won, and if it is 0, it indicates that the role has not won. The winning symbol flag is the same as the internal winning flag. As shown in FIG. 16A, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), and the 2nd bit corresponds to the regular bonus. 10th bit corresponds to replay, 11th bit corresponds to JAC, 12th bit corresponds to 1 ball (1), 13th bit corresponds to 1 ball (2), 14th bit corresponds to bell, 15th bit corresponds to cherry Yes. The third to ninth bits do not correspond to any combination. By comparing the winning symbol flag and the winning flag, the CPU 41a performs an abnormal winning determination.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred by performing an AND operation on the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag. Of the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination allowed in the game is 0, and when this winning combination is won, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1. However, even if no winning is made, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0, the result of the logical product operation is always 0. On the other hand, of the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the combination that is not allowed in the game is 1, and when this combination does not win, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0. In this case, the result of the logical product operation is 0. However, when the prize is won, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1, the result of the logical product operation is 1. For this reason, if even one unacceptable winning combination wins, the result of the logical product operation of the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag becomes a value other than 0. In this case, the abnormal winning is determined. Will be.

  FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the flow of processing until the CPU 41a determines an abnormal prize paying attention to changes in register values.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, at the start of processing execution, the upper 8 bits of the winning flag are stored in the H register, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag are stored in the L register, and the B register is stored in the B register. Suppose that the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, first, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag stored in the L register are stored in the A register. Further, all bits of the A register are inverted, and a logical product (AND) of the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag stored in the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, and the result is stored in the A register. To do. As a result, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is stored in the A register.

  This [all-bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is when the winning specified by the winning symbol is a winning permitted by the internal winning flag [00H], otherwise, it is a value other than [00H] and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, of the lower 8 bits, the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning}, and the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1 ) Winning}, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 01H] is [00H]. On the other hand, if the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning} and the second bit of the winning design flag is 1 {Regular Bonus Winning}, all of the [Internal Winning Flag (Lower 8 Bits)] Bit inversion value AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 04H] is 04H, and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning.

  Similarly, by using the H register and the C register, for the upper 8 bits, the [all bit inversion value of the internal winning flag (upper 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (upper 8 bits)] is calculated and the result is calculated. Store in A register. If the A register is other than [00H], it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 is divided into important work, general work, special work, set value work 1 to 3, non-saved work, unused area, and stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as the stop control table, the stop symbol, the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out, the total number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out during the big bonus, etc. Work. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work 1 is a work in which a set value used when performing lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode), 1 is set. The setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The set value work 2 is a set value used to determine whether or not the set value read from the set value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the set value stored at the end of the setting. Is stored, and the setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The setting value work 3 is whether or not the setting value read from the setting value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the setting value used when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process of the previous game. This is a work for storing a setting value used when determining whether or not the setting value of the previous game is stored, and a setting value newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. When the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process for each game, the value is updated to the value read from the set value work 1. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 starts from the four at the end of one game when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, and at the time of activation. When the initialization condition is satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. Initialization 1 uses the storage area of the RAM 41c. All areas except the middle stack area (including the unused area and the unused stack area) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. In the initialization 3, the unsaved work, the unused area, and the The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, to initialize the storage area of the RAM 41c is to clear the data in the target area to 0, that is, to update the value of the target area to 0. The area data may be rewritten to a predetermined initial value.

  Next, an external output signal output from the slot machine 1 to an external device will be described. The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 pays out in response to the occurrence of a regular bonus, an RB signal indicating a big bonus, a BB signal indicating a big bonus, a ball IN signal indicating the number of pachinko balls used for setting a bet, and a winning. Output control is performed to output a sphere OUT signal indicating the number of pachinko spheres as an external output signal. As shown in FIG. 17, the game control board 40 can be connected to an external device via the external output board 110, and an external output signal output by the output control of the CPU 41a is connected to the external output board 110. Output to external devices.

  FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the output status of the RB signal and BB signal when a big bonus occurs.

  When the big bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting the BB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the big bonus that starts the output of the RB signal with the occurrence of the regular bonus (from OFF to ON state), the transition to the regular bonus is repeated until the end condition is satisfied, so the regular bonus is always controlled. However, as shown in FIG. 18, when the regular bonus is once ended and the next regular bonus is started, the CPU 41a stops outputting the RB signal indicating the occurrence of the regular bonus to be ended ( When the output waiting time tw elapses, the output is started again (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the big bonus is established and the regular bonus ends with this, the output of the RB signal is stopped (from the ON state to the OFF state), and then the output of the BB signal is also stopped (ON) To OFF state).

  Thus, when the regular bonus ends during the big bonus and the regular bonus starts again, the output of the RB signal is stopped for the output waiting time tw, and then the output is started again. It is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has input the RB signal. Note that the output waiting time tw may be a time longer than the time at which it is possible to determine that the signal has been interrupted by the external device.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a setting start command, and an initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify that the bet number has been set, and is transmitted when a pachinko ball is taken in and the bet number is set.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the winning flag and the type of the winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the game is started by operating the start switch 7.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of pachinko balls to be paid out at the time of winning, and is sent after all reels have stopped and the winning determination has been made. The

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of pachinko balls, and is transmitted when payout of the pachinko balls is started by winning or paying out the already-acquired balls. The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of the pachinko ball, and is transmitted when the payout of the pachinko ball is completed by winning and paying out the already-acquired ball.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in a start-up process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (A) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the effect control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 receives the command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table also includes specific commands (reel stop command indicating automatic stop, winning determination command indicating occurrence of winning, payout start command, payout end, gaming state command indicating end of big bonus, standby command, stop Command, error command, setting start command, initialization command, etc.) are stored, and the CPU 91a is set in the game when receiving these specific commands. Regardless of the effect pattern being performed, a specific control pattern corresponding to the command is referred to, and the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. If a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. When the payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect that is being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, the other effects and the effects accompanying the payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. As will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are in the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed and the state when the progress stage ends (for example, the final screen on the liquid crystal display 51). Is continuously displayed and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the standby pattern described above is referred to as the control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  The CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 is for RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (effect) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  In addition, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 starts the reel rotation when a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R after the reel rotation is started. After the command is acquired, when the predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without acquiring the reel stop command, or after the stop operation of the first reel or the second reel is performed, the next reel stop operation is performed. When a predetermined time (60 seconds or 30 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without being performed, that is, after acquiring a reel stop command for the first and second reels, a predetermined time (without acquiring a new reel stop command) In this embodiment, when 60 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, a promotion notification that prompts a stop operation of the reel is performed.

  Specifically, after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start to rotate, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated effectively for a predetermined time, as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b). Then, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a text message “Please stop the reels” is displayed as a prompt notification for prompting the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  As a notification pattern (notification mode) of the promotion notification in the present embodiment, for example, the message is displayed in black characters in a white background frame in the lower area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 on which a predetermined effect image is displayed. Two types of notifications, that is, a notification pattern 1 (see FIG. 19A) to be displayed and a notification pattern 2 (see FIG. 19B) in which the message is displayed in white characters in a black background frame. The pattern is set by a notification pattern lottery performed for each game in accordance with the winning status of the special combination (big bonus (1), (2) flag, regular bonus flag) in the game.

  The notification pattern lottery is performed when an internal winning command transmitted from the game control unit 41 is acquired, and the notification pattern selected in the notification pattern lottery is a notification pattern applied when executing a promotion notification in the game. Set as In this embodiment, when the game is a bonus game, the notification pattern 1 is uniformly set without performing the notification pattern lottery.

  As shown in the notification pattern distribution table of FIG. 20, the winning probability of each of these notification patterns varies depending on the internal winning status of the bonus flag, and the notification pattern 1 is determined when the bonus flag is won, that is, the internal pattern described above. The lottery is won with a probability of 50% when the big bonus (1), (2) and regular bonus internal winning flags are set, and with a probability of 95% when the bonus flag is not won. The notification pattern 2 is won with a probability of 50% when a bonus is won, and is won with a probability of 5% when a bonus is not won.

  In other words, in this embodiment, two types of notification patterns 1 and 2 having different modes are registered in advance, and at the time of winning the bonus, notification is made with a higher probability (50%) than when the bonus is not won (5%). Since the pattern 2 is selected, when the promotion notification is executed, the game is displayed when the notification screen based on the notification pattern 2 is displayed rather than when the notification screen based on the notification pattern 1 is displayed. One can expect that the big bonus (1), (2), regular bonus is won.

  Further, in this embodiment, any stop switch between the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the elapse of 60 seconds that is the first notification waiting time (predetermined notification waiting time) has elapsed. When the effective operation of 8L, 8C, 8R is not detected, the above-described promotion notification is executed. Specifically, when the reel rotation start command transmitted from the game control unit 41 is acquired, the counter value of the first counter (60 seconds in this embodiment) is set as the counter value of the notification counter assigned to the RAM 91c. Subtraction (timekeeping) of the value is started, and when the counter value becomes 0, control for displaying a notification screen based on the set notification pattern on the liquid crystal display 51 is performed.

  Further, when a reel stop command is acquired from the game control unit 41 until the counter value reaches 0 after the subtraction of the notification counter is started, it is assumed that a valid stop operation has been detected, and the counter value of the notification counter Is cleared and if the promotion notification is performed, the display of the notification screen based on the notification pattern is cleared (terminated) and the promotion notification is ended.

  If all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating when the reel stop command is acquired, the game ends. However, any reels 2L, 2C, When 2R is rotating, the measurement of the notification waiting time is started again when the last effective stop operation is detected, that is, from the time when the stop command is finally acquired.

  Specifically, when the promotion notification is not yet executed in the game at the time of the last acquisition of the stop command, the first value (60 seconds in this embodiment) is set as the counter value of the notification counter. set. In addition, when the promotion notification has been executed once or more in the game, a second value (30 seconds in this embodiment) smaller than the first value is set as the counter value of the notification counter. Then, subtraction of the counter value of the notification counter is started.

  When the promotion notification is already executed at least once in the game at the time when the stop command is finally acquired, the second value smaller than the first value as the counter value of the notification counter (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) is set in a state where effective stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not performed again in the game even though the promotion notification is executed once or more in the game. This is to avoid a decrease in the operating rate by executing the promotion notification earlier than the first time.

  Further, the CPU 91a starts the promotion notification based on the notification pattern set at that time when the counter value becomes 0 after the start of subtraction of the notification counter. For example, when the counter value becomes 0 When the notification pattern 2 having a higher expectation level for the internal winning of the bonus flag than the notification pattern 1 is set, it is displayed on the variable display section corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stopped at that time. When the displayed result is a complete loss, that is, a display mode that can be displayed when any winning flag is not set, the notification based on the notification pattern 1 is started. In spite of the fact that the display mode derived in (3) is clearly completely losing, the notification pattern 2 is highly expected for the bonus. Also display a notification screen based, because you can not increase the degree of expectation for the player's bonus, it is possible to avoid the execution of meaningless notification.

  In this embodiment, the notification waiting time is measured by subtraction of the counter value. However, the notification waiting time may be measured by addition of the counter value. The promotion notification may be started when the value reaches the second value or when the second value smaller than the first value is reached.

  Further, the CPU 91a determines whether or not the game is a bonus game when the counter value reaches 0 after the start of the subtraction of the notification counter. Even if is set, the notification pattern 1 is set. In other words, during the bonus, even if the notification screen based on the notification pattern 2 with a high expectation level for the bonus is displayed, the player's expectation level for the bonus cannot be increased, so that execution of meaningless notification can be avoided.

  In addition, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 continuously executes the game over a plurality of games, and executes a continuous effect of notifying whether or not the bonus is finally won.

  FIG. 21A is a flowchart showing the flow of continuous performance.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the continuous performance is executed in response to the chance eye being stopped in the normal gaming state. As described above, the chance item is a display mode that appears only when one of the bonuses is won or one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won. This is a display mode that stops at a higher rate than when none of the bonuses are won, and a display mode that involves a transition from the next game to the RT of two games. Therefore, the continuous performance triggered by the chance is executed at a higher rate when any bonus is won than when any bonus is not won, and to RT of two games It is executed when there is a transition.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types of patterns in which two or three games are continued in the continuous performance, and when the chance stops, as shown in FIG. A pattern is selected, and a continuous effect is executed based on the selected pattern.

  In the present embodiment, when the chance is stopped as described above, the game proceeds to RT of two games, and during that time, the winning probability of replay is higher than in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, if a replay is won while the bonus is being carried over, the control where the replay is aligned on the winning line is prioritized over the control where the bonus is aligned on the winning line, and the resulting bonus is not aligned on the winning line. Although controlled, it becomes difficult to align the bonuses, but in the continuous production, the production continues for two games that are the same as the number of continuous games of RT or three games that are one game more than the number of continuous games of RT. . For this reason, after the start of the continuous production, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the bonus, the replay is almost complete and the bonus is won during the period until the continuous production ends (in the case of 3 games, the period excluding the final game). It becomes a state where it cannot be determined whether or not. Also, even if the replay is not complete and the targeted bonus is not aligned, a pattern different from the targeted pattern ("Blue 7" if "Red 7", "Red 7" if "Blue 7") Since there is a possibility that it has been missed and there is almost no chance that there will be no continuous replays, the bonus win will be denied while the continuous production continues (excluding the final game in the case of 3 games) There is no end.

  If the chance stops during execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is not newly executed. Further, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and when the bonus win is announced, the continuous effect is not further executed.

  Next, the content of the continuous effect process will be described.

  All the continuous effects are performed by displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, the effects for each individual game in the continuous effects are all started when the start switch 7 is operated, and are ended when all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. There are two types of performance results for each game other than the final game: player side attacks and player side damage, and final game results are two types of player wins and losses. However, there are many types of production processes.

  As described above, the continuous effect is started when the chance is derived as the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. And in the continuous production triggered by the chance chance being derived based on the winning of one of the bonuses, all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the game (final game) in which the continuous production ends. When the operation stops, the fact that the bonus is won (player win) is definitely notified.

  In addition, in the case of continuous production triggered by chances being derived without winning any bonus, if no bonus is won between the start of the continuous production and the end of the game, continuous production will be performed. As a result, the result of the loss (player loss), that is, the fact that none of the bonuses has been won is notified. On the other hand, one of the bonuses was won from the start of the continuous production until the end, and when the bonus won by the end of the continuous production did not win, the continuous production was terminated and the result of the loss was reported. As it is, the player is notified of contents different from the situation at the time.

  For this reason, at the start of the final game, it is determined whether any bonus has been won after the production has started, and if any bonus has not been won after the continuous production has started, At the end of the game, you will be notified of the result of the losing, and if you win any bonus after starting the continuous production, will you be surely notified that you have won the bonus by replacing the result of the final game production? The additional effect is executed in the next game without replacement, and it is definitely notified that the bonus is won by this additional effect.

  Regardless of whether it was announced as a result of a continuous performance or as a result of an additional performance, if a final notification that a bonus has been won has been made, the bet number is set in the next game In addition, the type of bonus that is won at a predetermined rate (big bonus (1) or big bonus (2), regular bonus) may be notified.

  There are a plurality of patterns in the continuous effect and the additional effect. FIGS. 21B to 21D are diagrams showing a continuous effect selection table for selecting a pattern of continuous effects and additional effects. There are three types of continuous effect selection tables: a non-winning time table shown in FIG. 21B, a winning time table shown in FIG. 21C, and an additional effect table shown in FIG. The pattern of the continuous performance is determined by referring to the non-winning time table or the winning time table according to a random number for selecting the continuous performance pattern.

  The non-winning time table shown in FIG. 21B is a table for selecting a pattern of continuous effects that is started when a chance is derived in a state where no bonus is won. In the non-winning time table, the contents of effects to be replaced in the final game when any bonus is won before the game in which the continuous effects performed in accordance with the pattern selected according to this are completed are also registered. In particular, content that is not included when there is no replacement is registered as the content of the effect that is replaced. For this reason, when one of the bonuses is won in the middle of the continuous production and the content of the production is replaced, the production in a different form from the production in the case where the content of the production is not replaced is performed.

  The winning time table shown in FIG. 21 (c) is a table for selecting a pattern of continuous effects that is started when a chance is derived by winning one of the bonuses. Regardless of which table the continuous effect pattern is selected, the number of games in which the continuous effect continues is two games or three games.

  The additional effect table shown in FIG. 21 (d) is for selecting a pattern of an additional effect that is performed after the continuous effect ends when a new bonus is won in a state where the continuous effect has already been performed. It is a table. The additional effect pattern is selected in accordance with the continuous effect pattern performed at that time. Further, the contents of the additional effects are registered that are not included in the continuous effects. For this reason, when an additional effect is performed, an effect different from the continuous effect is performed.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the game control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and when the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal has not been input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), the state of the stop switch 36 is acquired, and a specific register of the CPU 41a is acquired. The valid / invalid of the stop function is set in (Sa4). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption. In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, so an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 23, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is confirmed, it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sb3), and the error code indicates an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error. In this case, after initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5), and the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. If the operation is not detected, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected.

  If an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb6), and the display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is stacked in the step Sb1. (Sb7) to return to the original processing.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 is operated to return to the original processing even when the error state is canceled. If error processing is performed, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 22, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work 1 is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 24, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 24, the setting value stored in the setting value work 1 of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work 1 has been corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is 1) (Sc1).

  After that, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added to (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set values selected at that time are stored in the set value works 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c, respectively, and the set values are confirmed. (Sc7) Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 22, and the process proceeds to game processing.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether or not the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to an abnormal error process. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a prize ball giving process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the game end process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start switch 7 is operated is executed. .

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in step Sd4, when it is determined in step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has stopped, a winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the prize ball granting process in the step Sd5, when it is determined in the step Sd4 that a prize has been generated, a process of requesting payout of pachinko balls corresponding to the number of prize balls given in accordance with the prize is performed.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process for setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the control content of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in the step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of betting numbers determined according to the gaming state. 1 is set when in the regular bonus, and 3 is set when in the normal gaming state and RT.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and a replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is stored in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether the game is a replay game based on whether it is set (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a specified number (Se5). If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to Step Se4, and if the value of the BET counter is the specified number, the process proceeds to Step Se6.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, the process proceeds to step Se6. In the step of Se6, the setting before waiting for capture is performed, and then the process proceeds to the step of Se7. In the setting before waiting for taking-in, the detection of the one-ball taking-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In the step of Se7, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se7, the process proceeds to the step of Se10, and if the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se8).

  If the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number in the step of Se8, the process returns to the step of Se6. In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se9, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of the number of bets based on the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the settlement of the already-taken balls based on the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is stored in the upper plate 26. Returning the pachinko ball to the lower plate 25 of the pachinko ball and the pachinko ball in the capture device 100 to be described later is prohibited. Since the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, setting of the bet number is prohibited until the BET process of the next game. Further, since the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing, the settlement of the captured ball until the next game BET processing, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26, and a later-described one. Returning the pachinko ball in the take-in device 100 to the lower plate 25 is prohibited.

  In step Se10, it is determined whether or not an operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 has been detected. If the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se10, the process proceeds to the step of Se15, and if the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c. , It is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se11). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se11, the process returns to the step of Se6. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 After invalidating the detection of the operation (Se12), the value of the fetched ball counter set in the RAM 41c (the counter that stores the number of fetched balls that has not been fetched among the number of balls to be fetched) is set to 1. (Se13), and the process proceeds to the capture control process shown in FIG. 29 (Se14). Then, when the capture control process in the Se14 step is completed, the process returns to the Se6 step. For this reason, when the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 is detected and the process proceeds to the take-in control process, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the checkout switch 10, and the start switch 7 The detection of the operation is invalidated, the bet number is set, the paid-in ball is settled, the pachinko ball stored in the upper plate 26 and returned to the lower plate 25 of the pachinko ball in the take-in device 100 described later, the game Will be prohibited from starting.

  In step Se15, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se15, the process proceeds to the step of Se20, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se16). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se16, the process returns to the step of Se6. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 After invalidating the operation detection (Se17), the value of the take-in ball counter is set to (specified number × 5-BET counter value × 5-unused ball counter (the counter set in the RAM 41c). The value is updated (Se18) to the take-in control process shown in FIG. 29 (Se19). Then, when the capture control process in the Se19 step ends, the process returns to the Se6 step. For this reason, when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected and the process shifts to the capture control process, the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is detected until the process is completed. Is invalidated, the number of bets is set, the paid-in ball is settled, the pachinko ball stored in the upper plate 26 and returned to the lower plate 25 of the pachinko ball in the take-in device 100 described later, and the game is started. It will be prohibited.

  In step Se20, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se6, and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se21), and if the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se6. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se21, after the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated (Se22), the settlement control shown in FIG. When the process proceeds (Se23) and the settlement control process ends, the process returns to the step Se6. For this reason, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, and when the process proceeds to the settlement control process, the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is detected until the process is completed. Invalidation, setting of the number of bets, settlement of already-acquired balls, pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 and return to the lower plate 25 of pachinko balls in the capture device 100, which will be described later, are prohibited from starting the game Will be.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement control process executed by the CPU 41a in step Se23 of FIG.

  In the settlement control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the unused ball counter is 0 (Se101). If the value of the unused ball counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 ( Se102).

  If either the value of the unused ball counter or the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the steps of Se101 and Se102, an unsettled ball counter (a counter set in the RAM 41c, The value of (the counter that stores unsettled spheres that have not been paid out yet) is set to the value of (unused sphere counter value + BET counter value × 5), that is, the number of unused spheres and the used spheres. The total value with the number is updated (Se103), and the values of the unused ball counter and the BET counter are cleared (Se104). Then, the process proceeds to a payment request process for requesting payment of the pachinko ball for the value of the unsettled ball counter to the payout control board 60 (Se105). When the payment request process is completed, the payment control process is terminated as it is. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the unused ball counter value and the BET counter value are both 0 in the steps of Se101 and Se102, whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, that is, the return ball in the return ball guide passage 109 is detected. (Se106), and if the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected, that is, in the payout ball guiding passage 208. It is determined whether or not the payout ball is clogged (Se107). Then, if the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected in the step of Se106 or the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected in the step of Se107, the settlement control process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If neither the return ball clogging detection switch 111 nor the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected in the steps of Se106 and Se107, the rotational drive amount of the take-in motor 101 is set to 100 balls (Se108), and the sorting solenoid is set. 102 is turned on (Se119), and the flow direction of the taken pachinko sphere is set to the return ball guiding passage 109 side.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is the return ball guiding path 109 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is on (Se110). If the actual flow path direction is on the return ball guiding passage 109 side, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned on and the take-in operation is started (Se111). That is, based on the detection state of the flow path detection switch 115 that detects the flow path direction of the flow path switching valve 107, the drive of the take-in motor 101 is performed on the condition that the actual flow path direction faces the return ball guide path 109 side. To start.

  While the intake motor 101 is being driven, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the return ball guiding path 109 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is on (Se112). ) If the flow path direction is on the return ball guide passage 109 side, it is determined whether or not a drive stop condition for the take-in motor 101 is satisfied (Se113 to Se116). Specifically, in the step of Se113, the detection status of the capture ball detection switch 105 is checked, and whether or not the capture ball has been detected for a specified time (for example, 3 seconds) since the last capture ball is detected. It is determined whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected in the step of Se114, that is, whether or not the return ball is clogged in the return ball guiding passage 109, and in the step of Se115, the payout ball is clogged. It is determined whether or not the detection switch 112 is detected, that is, whether or not the payout ball is clogged in the payout ball guide passage 208, and in the step of Se116, the rotation for the rotation drive amount, that is, the rotation for 100 balls is completed. Determine whether or not.

  If none of the drive stop conditions for the take-in motor 101 is satisfied in steps Se113 to Se116, the process returns to step Se112. Further, when any one of the drive conditions of the take-in motor 101 is established in the steps of Se113 to Se116, that is, when the take-in ball has not been detected for a specified time since the last take-in ball was detected. When the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, when the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected or when rotation for 100 balls is completed, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off ( Se117), the process of setting the flow direction of the pachinko sphere taken in by turning off the sorting solenoid 102 to the side of the take-in ball guide passage 108 (Se118), the settlement control process is terminated, and the flowchart of FIG. Return to.

  Further, when the flow path direction is not on the return ball guiding passage 109 side in the step of Se110 or Se112, that is, the flow switching valve is switched to the return ball guiding passage 109 side with the sorting solenoid 102 turned on. When the flow direction by 107 is not switched to the return ball guide passage 109 side, or while the take-in motor 101 is being driven, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the on state, and the flow direction is at the return ball guide passage 109 side. In spite of the fact, if the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off (Se119), and the sorting solenoid 102 is turned off. (Se120), and after setting an error code indicating a channel direction error indicating a channel direction error in the register (Se12) ). The process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 23 (Se122). Then, when the error state is canceled and the error process is finished, the settlement control process is finished and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control content of the capture control process executed by the CPU 41a in step Se14.

  In the take-in control process, first, 3 is set in the retry counter set in the RAM 41c (a counter for storing the retry count of the take-in operation) (Se301), and the take-in motor 101 corresponding to the value of the take-in ball counter is set. , That is, the rotational drive amount necessary to capture the number of spheres set in the capture ball counter is set (Se302). In this state, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is in the state facing the intake ball guiding path 108 side.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the intake ball guiding path 108 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is in an off state (Se303). If the actual flow path direction is based on the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side, the take-in motor 101 is set to on and the take-in operation is started (Se304). That is, based on the detection state of the flow path detection switch 115 that detects the flow path direction of the flow path switching valve 107, the condition of the intake motor 101 is determined on the condition that the actual flow path direction faces the intake ball guide passage 108 side. Start driving.

  While the intake motor 101 is being driven, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the intake ball guiding path 108 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is in an off state ( Se305) If the flow path direction is on the side of the take-in ball guide passage 108, the detection status of the take-in ball detection switch 105 is checked to determine whether or not a take-in ball has been detected (Se306).

  When the captured ball is detected in the step of Se306, the value of the captured ball counter is decremented by 1, and the value of the unused ball counter is incremented by 1 (Se307). At this time, the number of captured balls displayed on the captured / paid-in ball display 11 is also incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the unused ball counter is 5, that is, whether or not the number of balls necessary to set the bet number is 1 (Se308). If the value of the unused ball counter is less than 5, Se305 is determined. Return to the step. If the value of the unused sphere counter is 5 in the step of Se308, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 and the value of the unused sphere counter is cleared (Se309), and the process returns to the step of Se305.

  Further, if the take-in ball is not detected in the step of Se306, it is determined whether or not the take-in motor 101 is on, that is, whether or not the take-in motor 101 is still being driven (Se310). If 101 is on, it is determined whether or not the rotation for the rotation drive amount, that is, the value of the take-in ball counter has ended (Se311). If the rotation for the rotation drive amount has not ended, the process proceeds to Se305. Returning to the step, if the rotation for the rotational drive amount has been completed, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off (Se312), and the process returns to the step of Se305.

  If the take-in motor 101 is not on in the step of Se310, the take-in motor 101 is turned off, and the pachinko ball taken in by the rotation of the take-in motor 101 is detected by the take-in ball detection switch 105. It is determined whether or not a detection waiting time which is a time required until the detection waiting time has elapsed (Se313), and if the detection waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to the step of Se305.

  If the detection waiting time has elapsed in the step of Se313, whether or not the value of the take-in ball counter is 0, that is, the number of balls requested by the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is taken in. If the value of the take-in ball counter is not 0, that is, if the number of balls requested by the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 has not been taken in, It is determined whether or not the value of the retry counter is 0, that is, whether or not the capturing operation for capturing the shortage of pachinko balls has been performed for the number of retries (Se315). If the value of the retry counter is not 0, The value of the retry counter is decremented by 1 (Se316), and the process returns to the step of Se302.

  If the value of the take-in ball counter is 0 in the step of Se314, the retry counter value is cleared (Se317), the take-in control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the value of the retry counter is 0 in step Se315, the value of the take-in ball counter is cleared (Se318), the take-in control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Further, in the step of Se303 or Se306, when the flow path direction is not on the intake ball guide passage 108 side, that is, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path direction is on the intake ball guide passage 108 side. In spite of this, when the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the return ball guide passage 109 or when the take-in motor 101 is driven, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path If the direction of the flow path by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the return ball guide path 109 side even though the direction is the intake ball guide path 108 side, the setting of the intake motor 101 is set to off ( Se319) After clearing the values of the retry counter and the take-in ball counter (Se320), register an error code indicating an abnormal flow direction error indicating an abnormal flow direction. Set to (Se321), the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. 23 (Se322), the error state is canceled, the error processing is completed, and ends the capture control processing, returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 27.

  As described above, in the BET process, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effectively detected, the process proceeds to the settlement control process, and when the number of bets of 1 or more has already been set or the value of the unused ball counter is not 0. In this case, that is, when the taken-in ball remains, a settlement request is performed, and a settlement request process for returning the captured ball to the player is performed based on the settlement request, and then the settlement control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of bets is not set and the value of the unused ball counter is 0, the flow direction of the pachinko ball taken in by the take-in device 100 is set to the return ball guide passage 109 side. After the take-in motor 101 is driven in the state, control for returning the pachinko balls in the take-in device 100 is performed, and then the settlement control process is terminated.

  Further, when the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 is detected effectively, 1 is set in the take-in ball counter and the process proceeds to the take-in control process. Every time the take-in operation of the take-in operation for taking in the ball is performed, or the value of the take-in ball counter subtracted by the take-in ball detection by the take-in ball detection switch 105 becomes 0 or the take-in operation is performed once. The process is repeated until the value of the retry counter to be subtracted becomes 0, or any one of the conditions is satisfied, and when one of the conditions is satisfied, the capture control process is terminated.

  When the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected effectively, the number of used balls (the value of the BET counter × the number of balls used to set a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state (15 balls)) 5) and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of unused balls (the value of the unused ball counter), that is, the number of balls necessary to set the specified number of bets at that time is set in the take-in ball counter and loaded. The process shifts to control processing, and the value of the take-in ball counter obtained by subtracting the take-in operation for taking in pachinko balls corresponding to the value of the take-in ball counter by detecting the take-in ball with the take-in ball detection switch 105 is 0. Or the value of the retry counter that is subtracted every time the capture operation is performed is repeated until either of the conditions is met, and the capture is performed when either of the conditions is met. The control process ends.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, the prescribed number of bets and the values of the set value works 1 to 3 determined in advance according to the game state of the game are read (Sg1), and the process proceeds to the step of Sg2. The specified number is 3 in the normal gaming state and RT, and 1 in the regular bonus gaming state.

  In the step of Sg2, it is determined whether or not the bet number set in the game read out in the step of Sg1, that is, the value of the BET counter is a specified number. If the set bet number is the specified number, the Sg4 If the set number of bets is not the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sg3.

  In the step of Sg3, since the set bet number is not the prescribed number and the data stored in the RAM 41c may not be normal, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register, and the error shown in FIG. Transition to processing.

  In the step of Sg4, a setting for determining whether or not the setting value used for the lottery based on the values of the setting value workpieces 1 to 3 read in the step of Sg1, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value workpiece 1 is appropriate. Perform value judgment processing.

  In the set value determination process, as shown in FIG. 31, a set value determination process 1 (Sg51), a set value determination process 2 (Sg52), and a set value determination process 3 (Sg53) are sequentially executed.

  In the set value determination process 1 in the step of Sg51, as shown in FIG. 32, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game is appropriate. It is determined whether or not the value is within the range (Sg61). If the value read from the set value work 1 is not within the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg62). If the value read from the set value work 1 is a value in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 2 in step Sg52.

  In the set value determination process 2 in the step of Sg52, as shown in FIG. 33, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value set at the previous setting change (Sg71), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the values do not match, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg72), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 23, and the values read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the value matches, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 3 in step Sg53.

  In the set value determination process 3 in the step of Sg53, as shown in FIG. 34, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game (Sg81), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 3 If the value does not match, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg82), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 23, the value read from the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 If the read value matches, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the setting value determination process, whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game is within an appropriate range, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the previous setting change are set. By determining whether or not the set value matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game, respectively. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery of the game is an appropriate value, and if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate value in at least one of the determinations, the above-described RAM abnormality error In the same manner as when the data in the RAM 41c is determined not to be normal at the time of startup, an error state due to a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the progress of the game is disabled. It has become as to be.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sg6. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. A predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In the step of Sg6, the state number (any one of 0 to 4) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg7. In the step of Sg7, in the gaming state indicated by the state number, the first combination number to be drawn is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg8. In the step of Sg7, when the state number is 0 or 1, that is, when any special combination is not carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, 1 is assigned as the first combination number (Big Bonus (1)) ) And if the status number is 2 or 3, that is, if any special role is carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, 10 (replay) is set as the first role number to be drawn When the state number is 4, that is, in the case of a regular bonus, 14 (bell) is set as a winning number to be drawn first.

  In step Sg8, it is checked whether the common flag registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 10 is 1 in association with the role number to be processed. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step Sg9. If not, the process proceeds to step Sg10.

  In step Sg9, the address (see FIG. 10) of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 10 in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg11.

  In the step of Sg10, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the determination value of the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 10 in association with the processing target role number and the read setting value. Read the address of the number storage area. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg11.

  In the step of Sg11, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg9 or Sg10 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, the result of addition is set as a new random number value, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg12, and the number of determination values is determined by internal lottery. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg16. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg13, whether or not the role number to be processed is the last role number to be selected according to the status number (the role number 14 if the status number is 0-3, the role number 17 if the status number is 4). That is, it is checked whether or not the lottery for all the lottery targets has been completed. If the lottery is the final lottery number according to the state number, the process proceeds to step Sg15. If it is not the last winning combination number according to the status number, the process proceeds to step Sg14.

  In step Sg15, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step Sg14, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg8.

  In the step of Sg16, it is confirmed whether or not the combination number is 1 to 9, that is, a combination number indicating a special combination or a combination including a special combination. If the combination number is 1 to 9, the step of Sg17 is performed. If the combination number is not 1 to 9, the process proceeds to step Sg18.

  In the step of Sg17, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the step of Sg18, the general combination storing work of the RAM 41c is set. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step of Sg18, when the combination numbers are 1 to 3, since the general combination is not won, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared in this case.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Sh1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the step of Sh1, a wait time is newly set (Sh2).

  Next, the reel motor is set to start rotating, and the reel starts rotating (Sh3). Then, a stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the winning status of the combination, and the stop status of the other reels is created for each spinning reel (Sh4), and the setting when the stop preparation is completed is set (Sh5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when a constant-speed rotation of the reel is detected in the processing at the time of passing through the origin of a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected (Sh6). If any stop switch is not detected, a reel rotation error (a certain period or more) is detected. Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Sh7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an error in taking in the pachinko ball is further detected. Whether or not an error is detected other than the period when the take-in of the pachinko ball is detected, and a payout error (outside the period when the pay-out of the pachinko ball is allowed, It is determined whether or not an error determined when the pachinko ball has been paid out has occurred (Sh8, Sh9), and the process is not performed in steps Sh7 to Sh9. Also show the error to be determined, the flow returns to step Sh6.

  Further, when it is determined that a take-in error has occurred in step Sh8, or if a payout error is determined in step Sh9, an error code indicating a take-in / pick-up error during reel rotation is set in the register. (Sh10), the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. 23 (Sh11). When the error is released, the process returns to the step of Sh6 again.

  If it is determined in step Sh7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Sh12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 23 (Sh13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the step of Sh3 again, and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Sh6, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After acquiring and setting the work corresponding to the stop reel (Sh14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Sh15).

  Then, when the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation is stopped, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (Sh16). If all the reels are not stopped, the process returns to the step of Sh4, and all the reels are If it has stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  The winning determination process in this embodiment is mainly composed of three processes. The first process is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game. The second process is a process of determining an abnormal winning based on the winning flag and the winning symbol flag. The third process is a process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  The step of Sj1 is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game.

  The CPU 41a first performs a winning symbol determination process (Sj1), and proceeds to step Sj2. In the winning symbol determination process, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower eight bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register. The E register stores the number of payout pachinko balls (the number of prize balls).

  As described above, in step Sj1, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  The subsequent steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17 are processes for determining an abnormal winning based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag.

  In step Sj2, the value of the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) (winning flag) is stored in the HL register, and in step Sj3, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag as the value of the L register are stored in the A register. In step Sj4, all bits of the A register are inverted. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1, and converted to an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj5.

  In the step of Sj5, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register and the logical product (AND) of the value of the A register are calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj6. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj7.

  In step Sj7, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag, which is the value of the H register, are stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj8 to invert all the bits in the A register. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1 and converted into an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj9.

  In the step of Sj9, the logical product (AND) of the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj10. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj11.

  The step of Sj17 is a jump destination when it is determined in the steps of Sj6 and Sj10 that the A register is not 0, that is, when a prize other than the prize allowed in the game is won, and indicates an abnormal prize error. The error code is set in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  As described above, the abnormal winning is determined based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag by the steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17.

  The subsequent steps Sj11 to Sj18 (excluding Sj17) are processes at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  In the step of Sj11, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj12, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the B register and the A register The logical sum (OR) of the values is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj13.

  In step Sj13, it is determined whether the A register is 0. If it is 0, that is, if no winning combination has been won, the process is terminated. If the winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step Sj14.

  In step Sj14, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register is inspected for the bit (sixth bit) corresponding to replay, and when the value is 0, that is, other than replay When the winning combination is won, 1 is set to the zero flag, and when the value is 1, that is, when the replay is won, 0 is set to the zero flag. The process proceeds to step Sj15 to determine whether the zero flag is 1. If it is 1, the process jumps to step Sj18, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sj16.

  In step Sj16, a process when a replay is won, such as setting a flag during replay game indicating a replay game, is performed, and the process ends.

  The step of Sj18 is a jump destination when it is confirmed in the step of Sj15 that a winning combination other than replay has been won, and a process at the time of winning that is performed when a winning combination other than replay such as calculation of the number of payout balls is won. Implement and finish the process.

  As described above, according to the steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17, the process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag is performed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sj18.

  In the winning process, first, with reference to the role table shown in FIG. 10, the game state (state number) of the game and the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning indicated by the winning symbol flag are set (Sj21), and the step of Sj22 Proceed to

  In step Sj22, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If neither the big bonus (1) nor the big bonus (2) has been won. , Go to step Sj25. If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won, the big bonus medium flag indicating that the big bonus is being set is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) ( In step Sj23), the process proceeds to step Sj24, and the value of the big bonus medium payout counter in which the total payout number of pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c is initialized (set to 0) (Sj24). Go to step.

  In step Sj25, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the regular bonus is not won in the step of Sj25, the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If a regular bonus has been won in step Sj25, a regular bonus medium flag indicating that the regular bonus is in effect is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sj26), and the regular bonus is set. After the value of the game counter and the value of the regular bonus winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus are stored are initialized (Sj27), the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  38 and 39 are flowcharts showing the control details of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not RT is in progress based on whether or not the RT flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk1), and if not RT, the process proceeds to step Sk5. If RT is in progress in the step of Sk1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the RT game number counter assigned to the RAM 41c in order to store the remaining number of RT games (Sk2), and the remaining RT game number is 0, that is, the RT game. It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is 0 (Sk3). If the number of remaining RT games is not 0 in the step of Sk3, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the number of remaining RT games is 0, the RT flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk4), and the step of Sk5 is performed. Proceed to

  In the step of Sk5, it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state. In the step of Sk5, it is determined that the normal gaming state is set when none of the RT flag, the big bonus flag, and the regular bonus flag are set in the RAM 41c. If it is not the normal gaming state in the step of Sk5, the process proceeds to the step of Sk9, and if it is the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to the step of Sk6, and it is determined whether or not the chance eye is stopped as a display result of the game.

  If the chance is not stopped in step Sk6, the process proceeds to step Sk9. If the chance is stopped, the RT flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk7), and the RT game number counter is set to 2 (Sk8). ), Go to step Sk9.

  In step Sk9, it is determined whether a regular bonus is in progress. In step Sk9, when the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the RB signal is ON, it is determined that the regular bonus is being performed.

  If the regular bonus is not in effect at step Sk9, the process proceeds to step Sk13. If the regular bonus is in the step of Sk9, the value of the regular bonus game number counter is decremented by 1, and if a win has occurred, the value of the regular bonus mid-winning counter is incremented by 1 (Sk10), and the regular bonus end condition Is determined, that is, whether the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus winning counter is 8 (Sk11). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step Sk11, the process proceeds to the step Sk13. If the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk12). ), Go to step Sk13.

  In step Sk13, it is determined whether a big bonus is in progress. In step Sk13, when the big bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the BB signal is ON, it is determined that the big bonus is being used.

  If the big bonus is not in the step of Sk13, the process proceeds to the step of Sk20, and if it is during the big bonus, the payout number of the pachinko ball (prize ball) of the game is added to the value of the big bonus medium payout counter. (Sk14), it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 2325 balls (Sk15). If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step of Sk15, the process proceeds to the step of Sk17. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are set. Clear (Sk16) and proceed to Step Sk20.

  In step Sk17, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk17, the process proceeds to the step of Sk20. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk17, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sk18), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sk19), the process proceeds to step Sk20.

  In step Sk20, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not in the ON state in Step Sk20, the process proceeds to Step Sk24. If the RB signal is in the ON state, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk21). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk21, that is, when the regular bonus ends and the regular bonus does not resume after that, the process proceeds to the step of Sk23. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk21, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk22). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk22, that is, when the regular bonus is reactivated during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk23, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk22. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition of the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk24. In step Sk23, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to step Sk24.

  In the step of Sk24, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in the step of Sk24, the process proceeds to the step of Sk27. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk24, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk25), and the process waits until the output waiting time of the RB in-progress signal elapses (Sk26), and when the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to Step Sk27.

  In the step of Sk27, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk27, the process proceeds to the step of Sk33. If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk27, whether or not the BB medium signal of the external output signals is ON. Is determined (Sk28). When the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk28, that is, when the big bonus is in progress and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk33, and the BB is in progress in the step of Sk28. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal of the external output signals is turned ON (Sk29), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. An effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk30 elapses is set (Sk30). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sk32.

  In step Sk32, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sk32, the process proceeds to the step of Sk35. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk32, whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. Is determined (Sk33). If the RB signal is ON in the step of Sk33, that is, if the regular bonus is in progress and the next game is not a regular bonus start game, the process proceeds to the step of Sk35, and the RB is in progress in the step of Sk33. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk34), and the process proceeds to step S35.

  In the step of Sk35, it is determined whether or not the BB signal among the external output signals is ON. If the BB signal is not ON in the step of Sk35, the process proceeds to the step of Sk47. If the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk35, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sk36). When the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk36, that is, when the big bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to the step of Sk47, and when the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk36, that is, the big bonus Is finished, the BB signal in the external output signal is set to the OFF state (Sk37), the waiting time for the ending effect is set in the register (Sk38), and the waiting time for the effect set in the step of Sk38 is set. An effect waiting process for waiting until the passage of time is performed (Sk39). After the effect waiting process in the step of Sk39 is completed, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sk40), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sk41.

  In step Sk41, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is not set to be effective in step Sk41, the process proceeds to step Sk47. If the stop function is set to be enabled in step Sk41, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. Then, the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sk43). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sk44). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, the operation waits until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. To do. When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sk44, the process proceeds to the step of Sk45.

  In step Sk45, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 is cleared (Sk46), and it progresses to the step of Sk47.

  In step Sk47, initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, and then the process at the end of the game is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is inactive during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not in operation during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is not determined. It is determined whether or not the bonus is not activated. If the bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB medium signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  FIGS. 40 and 41 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (A) executed by the CPU 41a by interrupting the start process or the game process in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, at an interval of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (A), first, interrupts are prohibited (Sn1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (A) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sn2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (A) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sn3). In the step of Sn3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (A) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sn4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sn8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sn23 described later is executed (Sn5).

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether it is 1 or not, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sn6). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, if it is timer interrupt 1, then the reel motor Reel start processing (Sn7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sn8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, a motor phase signal standby process (Sn9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a lapse of a certain time, and an acquisition motor control process (Sn10) for updating the rotational drive amount of the acquisition motor 101, etc. After sequential execution, the registers saved in the stack area in Sn2 are restored (Sn22), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted. (Sn23), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sn6, LED dynamic display processing (Sn10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port, etc. (Sn11), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sn12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sn13), and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sn14) and the external output signal update processing (Sn15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn22), and the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted. (Sn23) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the Sn4 step, it is further determined by referring to the branch counter value whether it is 3 or not, ie, the timer interrupt 4 (Sn17). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sn18) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference) (Passing position) is detected, the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected, whether stop preparation is completed (stop preparation completion code is set), stop preparation is complete, and If it is rotating at high speed, the process at the time of passing through the origin (Sn19) that validates the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel, and these various scans based on the detection signals of various switches. Register that is saved in the stack area in Sn2 after sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sn20) for determining whether the switch satisfies the detection condition and the same intake motor control process (Sn21) as the step of Sn10 (Sn22), the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted (Sn23), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 at the step of Sn16, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position when the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is determined, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated. Stop switch process (Sn24), the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted, and when it is time to stop, stop process (Sn25) to start braking by two-phase excitation, and brake in the stop process After executing the final stop process (Sn26) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start in sequence, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn22), and interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted. (Sn23), the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (A) described above.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right, whether or not a stop operation position is set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, a stop operation has been detected or stopped by automatic stop. Is determined (Sp1, Sp2). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels, or if no stop has been instructed, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If a stop operation of any of the reels is detected in the step of Sp1, the process proceeds to the step of Sp3, the stop control table corresponding to the reel is referred, and the work corresponding to the stop reel is set. From the region number including the number of steps of the stop operation position, the region number serving as the stop position is specified, and the process proceeds to step Sp4.

  In the step of Sp4, the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in the step of Sp3 is calculated, and after setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 43 shows the control contents of the interruption interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a when the interruption 2 occurs, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the interruption detection circuit 48 is input, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sq1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sq2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not input, the register saved in the stack area in Sq2 is restored (Sq4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sq1 is permitted (Sq5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sq3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sq6), and all output ports are initialized (Sq7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sq8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sq9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq10, where Sq10 is the same processing as Sq3), the processing enters a loop processing in which no processing is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the effect control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs an activation process (effect) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (production), after initializing the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, and the like (Ss1), access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Ss2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Ss3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Ss4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step of Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss5. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Ss5, it is determined whether or not the BB winning effect or ending effect has been executed before the power interruption. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has been executed, the BB winning effect or ending effect is executed. Has reached the final stage (Ss6). If the final stage has been reached, the final stage control pattern is set (Ss7), and then the liquid crystal display is set according to the set control pattern. The effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in step Ss5, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in step Ss6, After setting the last control pattern executed before disconnection (Ss8), the control of various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is performed according to the set control pattern. The effect control process to be performed is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, after the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss11), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Ss12). In accordance with the set control pattern, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Ss9), and interruption is permitted (Ss10). ), Shift to loop processing.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (effect) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (effect), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (St1). If no command is stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step St7. If a command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (St2), and the process proceeds to step St3.

  In the step of St3, the continuous effect process for executing the continuous effect is executed according to the received command, and the process proceeds to the step of St4.

  In the step of St4, when the received command is an internal winning command, it is determined whether or not an effect pattern for continuous effect is already set in the RAM 91c. If the effect pattern for continuous effect is not set, the ROM 91b is determined. An effect pattern is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the table, selecting an effect pattern at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. The selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step St5.

  In step St5, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step St6.

  In the step of St6, in accordance with the control pattern set in the step of St5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed. Proceed to step.

  In the step of St7, a promotion notification process for performing the promotion notification is executed, and the process proceeds to the step of St8.

  In step St8, after updating the values of various counters such as the random number counter in the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to step St9, where it is confirmed whether the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 so that the timer interrupt process (effect) is finished.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (effect) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of recovery is normal.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the continuous effect process executed by the CPU 91a in the step of St3.

  In the continuous effect process, first, it is determined what type of command triggered the process (Su1).

  If the command type is a BET command, a BET process described in detail later is performed (Su2), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the command type is an internal winning command, a start process described in detail later is performed (Su3), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the command type is a reel rotation start command, the information regarding the stop symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stored in the RAM 91c in the previous game is cleared (Su4), and the continuous effect process is terminated. Return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the command type is a reel stop command, a reel stop process described in detail later is performed (Su5), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the type of command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates that any bonus has been won (Su6), indicating that any bonus has been won. If not, the continuous effect process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the winning determination command indicates that one of the bonuses has been won, the value of the continuous counter indicating the number of remaining games of the continuous effect set in the RAM 91c is 0, and the additional effect is executed. It is determined whether the additional flag shown is not set, that is, the state where the continuous effect is not executed at the present time and the additional effect is not performed in the next game (Su7). If the value of the counter is 0 and no additional flag is set, the continuous effect process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Further, if the continuous counter is not 0 in the step of Su7, or if the additional flag is set, the continuous production being executed is ended (Su8), and the value of the continuous counter is cleared (Su9). Then, the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the command type is a gaming state command, the RAM 91c is provided with the gaming state (that is, the gaming state applied in the current game) saved in the gaming state saving area of the latest game in the previous game. The game state indicated by the game state command (that is, the game state applied in the next game) is stored in the game state storage area of the latest game provided in the RAM 91c. (Su10), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the command type is another command, the continuous effect process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Next, Su2 BET processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the BET processing, first, it is determined whether or not a confirmation notification flag that is set when notification of determination of bonus winning is notified to the RAM 91c (Sv1). If the confirmation notification flag is set, when all rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in the game before the previous time, the confirmation of the bonus winning is notified by the continuous effect or the additional effect. .

  In this case, a random number for type notification lottery is extracted by the software random number function, and a type notification lottery for determining whether or not to notify the type of bonus that is won by the extracted random number is performed (Sv2). Then, it is determined whether or not notification of the bonus type is determined in this type notification lottery (Sv3). If it is determined not to notify the bonus type, the process proceeds to Sv5.

  When it is determined that the type of bonus is to be notified, the player is selected by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the winning status stored in the RAM 91c in the process (described later) of step Sw1 of the previous game. The type of bonus (regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2)) is notified (Sv4). Then, the process proceeds to Sv5. In Sv5, the fixed notification flag set in the RAM 91c is erased. Then, the BET processing is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the confirmation notification flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is 0 (Sv6). If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, the continuous production has already been executed, so the BET processing is terminated as it is, and the flow returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the value of the continuous counter is 0, it is further determined whether or not an additional flag is set in the RAM 91c (Sv7).

  If the additional flag is not set, it is determined based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the previous game stored in the RAM 91c whether or not the chance is derived in the previous game (Sv8). . If no chance is derived in the previous game, the BET processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the chance is derived in the previous game, it is determined whether or not any bonus has been won according to the winning situation stored in the RAM 91c in the process of step Sw1 (described later) of the previous game (step Sv9). .

  If one of the bonuses is won, a random number for selecting a continuous effect pattern is extracted by the software random number function, and the winning effect table in the continuous effect selection table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to according to the extracted random number value. Then, select the pattern of continuous production that will start from now. The continuous effect pattern selected here is stored in the RAM 91c (Sv10). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv12.

  If none of the bonuses are won, a random number for selecting a continuous effect pattern is extracted by the software random number function, and the non-winning time table in the continuous effect selection table stored in the ROM 91b is referred according to the extracted random number value. Then, the pattern of the continuous production starting from now is selected. The continuous effect pattern selected here is stored in the RAM 91c (Sv11). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv12.

  In Sv12, a value corresponding to the effect pattern selected in Sv10 or Sv11 is set as an initial value in the continuous counter of the RAM 91c. Furthermore, the start effect is performed by displaying a predetermined image indicating the start of the continuous effect on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sv13). Then, the BET processing is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the continuous counter is not 0 in Sv6, the BET processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Further, if the additional flag is set in step Sv7, an additional effect is executed. Here, the resumption effect is performed by displaying a predetermined image indicating the start of the additional effect (the resumption of the continuous effect once finished) (Sv14). Then, the BET processing is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, Su3 start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, in the starting process, the winning situation (that is, the winning flag setting situation in the current game) indicated by the internal winning command that triggered the process is saved in the winning situation saving area of the latest game provided in the RAM 91c. (Sw1).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is 0 (Sw2). If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, the continuous effect has already started or at least the start effect has been performed. In this case, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c is a pattern selected based on the winning time table, and is a pattern for informing the confirmation of the bonus winning (Sw3). If it is not a pattern notifying that the bonus winning is confirmed, the process proceeds to the process of Sw12 as it is. If it is a pattern for notifying the confirmation of bonus winning, it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is 1 (Sw4). If the value of the continuous counter is not 1, the process proceeds directly to the step of Sw12.

  If the value of the continuous counter is 1, the continuous effect will end in the game, and it is further determined whether any bonus is won based on the winning situation stored in the RAM 91c (Sw5). . If no bonus is won, the process proceeds to the step of Sw12.

  If any bonus has been won, none of the bonuses have been won at the start of the continuous production, but a new bonus has been won during the execution of the continuous production. In this case, a predetermined random number is extracted by the software random number function, and it is determined whether to replace the content of the effect in the final game of the continuous effect according to the value of the random number or to perform the additional effect after the end of the continuous effect A replacement / addition determination lottery is performed (Sw6). As a result of the lottery, it is determined whether replacement of the content of the effect of the final game is determined or execution of the additional effect is determined (Sw7).

  When the replacement of the content of the effect in the final game of the continuous effect is determined, an effect replacement flag is set in the RAM 91c (Sw8). Further, the content of the effect in the final game is replaced according to the pattern of the continuous effect stored in the RAM 91c, and the image according to the effect after the replacement is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the effect in the final game of the continuous effect is started. (Sw9). Then, the start-time process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  On the other hand, when the execution of the additional effect is determined, the additional effect pattern is selected from the continuous effect selection table in accordance with the continuous effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c. The additional effect pattern selected here is also stored in the RAM 91c (Sw10). Further, an additional flag indicating execution of the additional effect is set in the RAM 91c (Sw11). And it progresses to the step of Sw12.

  In Sw12, an image corresponding to the continuous effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c and the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 122 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the effect for the current game in the series of continuous effects is started. . Then, the start-time process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the continuous counter is 0 in Sw2, it is further determined whether or not an additional flag is set in the RAM 91c (Sw13). If the additional flag is not set, the start process ends without starting any production here, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the additional flag is set, an image corresponding to the pattern of the additional effect stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to start the additional effect (Sw14). Then, the start-time process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the Su5 reel stop process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, in the reel stop process, the symbol stopped for the reel indicated by the reel stop command according to the reel stop command triggered by the process is stored in the stop symbol table of the RAM 91c (Sx1).

  Next, with reference to the stop symbol table, it is determined whether or not all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (Sx2). If there is still one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R that is still rotating, the reel stop process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  When all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is 0 (Sx3). If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the replacement flag is set in the RAM 91c because the continuous effect is being executed at this time (Sx4). If the replacement flag is set, an image corresponding to the content of the effect after replacement is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the result of the effect in the final game of the continuous effect (Sx5). Further, the replacement flag set in the RAM 91c is deleted, and the value of the continuous counter is cleared (Sx6). Then, the process proceeds to step Sx15.

  If the replacement flag is not set in Sx4, an image corresponding to the continuous effect pattern and the value of the continuous counter stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and this time of the series of continuous effects is displayed. The result of the effect for the game is notified (Sx7). Further, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c (Sx8). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter has become 0 as a result of the subtraction (Sx9). If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, the reel stop process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the value of the continuous counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c is a pattern selected based on the winning time table and is a pattern for informing the confirmation of the bonus winning. (Sx10). If it is a pattern for informing confirmation of bonus winning, the process proceeds to step Sx15.

  If it is not a pattern for notifying that the bonus is won, information indicating that the bonus has been lost is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the player (Sx11). Then, the reel stop process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the continuous counter is 0 in Sx3, it is determined whether an additional flag is set in the RAM 91c (Sx12). If the additional flag is not set, the reel stop process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the additional flag is set, the additional effect is being executed at this time, so an image corresponding to the additional effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the result of the additional effect is displayed. Informs (Sx13). Further, the additional flag in the RAM 91c is cleared (Sx14), and the process proceeds to step Sx15.

  In Sx15, a fixed notification flag is set in the RAM 91c. Further, information indicating that the bonus is won is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the player (Sx16). Then, the reel stop process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  50 and 51 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed by the CPU 91a in the step 5 of the timer interrupt process (effect).

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (Sy1). If the received command is a setting start command, the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in step Sy1, it is determined whether the received command is an initialization command (Sy3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (Sy4), the above-described standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy5), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in step Sy3, it is determined whether the received command is a standby command (Sy6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sy6 that the received command is not a standby command, it is determined whether the received command is a stop command (Sy8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of a stop state (Sy9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sy7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sy8, if the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (Sy11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether or not it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state (Sy12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (Sy13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is an error command indicating the release of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack at the time of occurrence of the error, ie, Sy13 is set (Sy15). Then, the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sy11 that the received command is not an error command, it is determined whether the received command is a payout start command (Sy16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (Sy17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as the sub-pattern in the step of Sy17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  If it is determined in step Sy16 that the received command is not a payout start command, it is determined whether the received command is a payout end command (Sy18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (Sy19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of Sy19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel ends, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step Sy18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (Sy20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (Sy21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the winning determination command does not indicate a big bonus, it is further determined whether or not a winning other than the big bonus is indicated (Sy23). If the winning determination command indicates a winning other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning winning pattern among winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern to be won is set as a control pattern (Sy24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If no win other than the big bonus is shown in the Sy23 step, the process proceeds to the Sy29 step.

  If the command received in step Sy20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether the received command is a gaming state command (Sy25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to step Sy29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (Sy26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (Sy27). If the game is a game for which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in step Sy27, the process proceeds to step Sy29.

  In step Sy29, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  52 to 54 are flowcharts showing the control details of the promotion notification process executed by the CPU 91a in the step St7 of the timer interrupt process (effect).

  In the promotion notification process, it is first determined whether or not at least one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating based on a setting state of a reel changing flag described later (Sr1). If none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is rotating, that is, if all the reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not a new internal winning command has been acquired (Sr2). If it is determined that the internal winning command is newly acquired, it is determined whether or not the game is in bonus from the gaming state set based on the last received gaming state command (Sr3). . If the bonus is not in effect, a notification pattern lottery for determining a notification pattern of the promotion notification that can be performed in the game is executed based on the notification pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 20 (Sr4). The notification pattern won in the lottery is set as a notification pattern for promotion notification that can be implemented in the game (Sr5), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If it is determined in step Sr3 that the bonus is being performed, the notification pattern 1 is set as a notification pattern that can be executed in the game without performing the notification pattern lottery (Sr6), and the flowchart shown in FIG. Return.

  If it is determined in step Sr2 that an internal winning command has not been newly acquired, it is determined whether a new reel rotation start command has been acquired (Sr7), and a new reel rotation start command has been acquired. If so, after setting the first value (= 60 seconds) as the counter value of the notification counter (Sr8), the reel changing flag is set (Sr9), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If at least one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating in the step of Sr1, it is determined whether or not the promotion notification is being executed based on the setting state of a notification flag that will be described later (Sr10). If the promotion notification is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the notification counter is 0 (Sr19). If the counter value is 0, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start to rotate. 60 seconds have passed since the last time, or 60 seconds or 30 seconds have passed since the last stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R was effectively operated, and it is determined whether or not the game is a bonus game (Sr27).

  If the promotion notification is being executed in step Sr10, the process proceeds to step Sr11 to determine whether a new reel stop command has been acquired (Sr11). If a new reel stop command has been acquired, the set notification flag is cleared (Sr12), and it is determined whether or not the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R has been stopped (Sr14). . If the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not stopped, a notification flag indicating that the promotion notification is executed in the game is set (Sr15), and the second counter value of the notification counter is set. After setting the value (= 30 seconds) (Sr16), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step Sr14, if all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped rotating, the reel changing flag is cleared (Sr17), and if the informed flag is set, it is cleared. After (Sr18), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the counter value of the notification counter is not 0 in step Sr19, the process proceeds to step Sr20 to determine whether a new reel stop command has been acquired (Sr20), and a new reel stop command is acquired. If so, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has stopped at that time (Sr21). If the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has not stopped, it is determined whether or not the informed flag is set (Sr22). If the informed flag is set, the notification counter is set. After setting the second value (= 30 seconds) as the counter value (Sr23), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the informed flag is not set, the first value (= 60 seconds) is set as the counter value of the informing counter (Sr24), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step Sr21, if all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating, the reel changing flag is cleared (Sr25), and if the notified flag is set, it is cleared. After (Sr26), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Next, in step Sr27, if the game is not a bonus game, it is determined whether or not the notification pattern 1 is set as the notification pattern (Sr31). If the notification pattern 1 is set, the notification flag is set (Sr32), the notification pattern 1 is set (Sr33), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step Sr27, if the game is a bonus game, the notifying flag is set (Sr28), the notifying pattern 1 is set, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the notification pattern 1 is set as the notification pattern in the step of Sr31, it is determined whether or not there are reels 2L, 2C, 2R that have already stopped at that time (Sr34). If there are any reels 2L, 2C, 2R that are stopped, it is determined whether or not the display result of the stopped reels is a complete loss (Sr35). The process proceeds to set the reporting flag (Sr32), sets the notification pattern 1 (Sr33), and returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, when the complete losing eye is derived and displayed, the promotion notification based on the notification pattern 1 is executed without setting the notification pattern 2 having a high expectation of the bonus set at that time. Thus, it is possible to avoid performing meaningless notification.

  In addition, if there is no reel that has already stopped at that time in step Sr34, and if it is not a complete loss in step Sr35, a notification flag is set (Sr36) and notification pattern 2 is set. After (Sr37), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stop position (display result) is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all reels are rotating among a plurality of stop control tables, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the reels are selected according to the selected stop control table. If any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel A control table is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When all of the reel stop statuses (and the stop positions (display results) of the stopped reels) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Therefore, as in the prior art, one stop control table is selected from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a reel control sorting lottery). There is no need to make a selection, and the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  Also, in this embodiment, at the start of reel rotation, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected for all reels, and the selected stop control table is selected. Each time the reels are controlled to stop, each time the reels stop, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stopped position of the stopped reel, that is, any one of the reels is stopped. The stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the stop positions of the stopped reels in the stopped state and the combination of the stop positions of the two stopped reels in the state where any two reels are stopped is selected and selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table. For example, any one reel When the reel is rotating, it selects a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel, and the selected stop control table. And when any of the reels is stopped (when two reels are stopped), a new stop control table is not selected and all reels are rotating. You may make it perform stop control of the remaining reels according to the stop control table selected when any one reel stopped.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any reel is already stopped, it is uniquely determined with respect to the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stopped position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table provided, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state, the reel stop status and the stop for each game state The reel stop control may be performed in accordance with a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the already-reel, and in this way, the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same, Even if the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, if the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different, the Because there is a stop control table is applied, it can display the results of the reel it more versatile.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels further stops (when two reels stop), the stop control table is not newly selected and all The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops while the other reel is rotating.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the reel that has stopped last, and to perform stop control of the reel according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely determined for the spinning reel. The selected stop control table is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels are stopped, A stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the states, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop operation position of the remaining reels of the stopped reels The reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, for the spinning reel, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected. Then, when any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol varies, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol varies, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table that is defined in a specific manner, that is, different stop control tables can be selected for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the reel stop control according to the table, for example, in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing), within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined in a specific reel. When the stop operation is performed, the same display result is derived. However, only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the other reels As the stop control table, a stop control table capable of deriving the display result constituting the chance eye was selected, and the same stop position was determined. When a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for another reel is selected. It is preferable.

  For example, in the normal gaming state, when any of the roles is not won (losing), the “watermelon” of the 3rd to 5th symbols can be used regardless of the timing at which the left reel is stopped in the region of the region number 5-8. "Bell Replay" is derived, but at this time, only when a stop operation is performed in the area of area number 7, as the stop control table for the middle reel, the above-described 11 for at least one area number is used. ~ 13th symbol "Cherry Replay Cherry", 21st, 1st, 2nd symbol "Cherry Bell Cherry" stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined, that is, the display constituting the chance eye When a stop control table from which a result can be derived is selected and a stop operation is performed in the areas of area numbers 5, 6, and 8, any area number is set as the stop control table for the middle reel. The stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which “Cherry / Replay / Cherry” of No. 11 to 13 and “Cherry / Belle / Cherry” of No. 21, 1 and 2 are specified is not defined. In other words, a stop control table that cannot derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye may be selected. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result of the reel from becoming monotonous when none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state (losing).

  Furthermore, in this case, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, among the area numbers in which the same stop position is determined, compared to the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. For many area numbers, it is preferable to select a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for other reels. In the case of winning any of the bonuses in, the chances are derived at a higher rate than in the case where none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the reel stop control according to the table, each time the reel stops, the reel to be stopped is either the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, the corresponding It is preferable to transmit a reel stop command that can specify the area number of the stop position of the reel to be performed to the effect control unit 91, so that the CPU 91 a of the effect control unit 91 can stop the reel when it stops. In addition, it is possible to perform different effects depending on not only the stop position of the reel but also the stop operation position.

  In particular, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the same display is displayed when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. The result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display that configures the chance as the stop control table of the other reels Select a stop control table that can derive the result, and stop other reels when a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is defined As a control table, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting an opportunity is selected, and any bonus is won in the normal gaming state. As a stop control table for other reels, the area numbers for which the same stop position is determined are larger than those in the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. When a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting a chance eye is selected, when the stop operation position satisfies the derivation condition of the chance eye when the reel stop command is received, that is, the chance eye When the stop control table from which the display result to be configured can be derived is a selected stop operation position, the ratio is higher than when other stop operation positions that do not satisfy the chance derivation condition but have the same stop position are used. Therefore, a special performance (for example, unusual stop sound, etc.) that informs the possibility of winning any special role may be performed. By doing so, the special effect is performed when the specific reel is stopped, which increases the possibility that the chance chance is finally derived as compared to the case where the special effect is not performed when the specific reel is stopped, As the special performance is performed, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the derivation of the chance and the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each range of a plurality of consecutive steps (in this embodiment, 4 steps each having one symbol change) is calculated. Since the reel stop control is performed using the uniquely determined stop control table, the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop control table is used in which the number of frames to be drawn is uniquely determined for each unit of the area in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the different timing of the stop operation can be changed. The display result of the reel can be derived in such a manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery, or when only one ball (1) is won, area numbers 4 to 8 or area numbers 10 to 10 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is performed at any timing within the 14 ranges, that is, when the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of 1 ball (1) cannot be pulled in even within a maximum of 4 frames, that is, 1 ball ( 1) If you cannot win a prize, if you do not win any role by internal lottery (losing), it will not be derived.・ "Watermelon Bell", 8-10 symbols "Bell Red 7 Bell" can be derived and if any bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one ball (2) In the case of selection, the timing of any one of the area numbers 6 to 8 or the area numbers 17 to 21 shown in FIG. 15, that is, the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) is maximized. When a stop operation is made at a timing that can not be drawn even within the range of 4 frames, that is, when one ball (2) could not be won, and if any of the roles is not won by internal lottery (losing) It is possible to derive the “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that will not be derived. By deriving the display results constituting these chance eyes, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role is won.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery and any other combination is not won, and when only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and When only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, and 13, the symbols 2 to 4 constituting the chance eye “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” or “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as display results, but if any of the roles are not won (losing), the region number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Not derived Therefore, when a bonus is won by an internal lottery, or only one ball (1) is won and a stop operation is performed at a timing when one ball (1) cannot be won, or one ball (2) When a stop operation is performed at a timing when only one player is won and one ball (1) cannot be won, the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. However, since it is possible to derive the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived, the display result that constitutes the chance eye is derived, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus. be able to.

  In addition, if any combination is not won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal time, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, and any bonus by internal lottery Except for the case where is won, one ball (1) or one ball (2) can win the chance to be derived. For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In this embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a display result constituting a chance eye may be derived no matter what timing the stop operation is detected. No stop control table is created. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 The “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) are not derived on any winning line for the stop operation position (area number) that is smaller than when only the ball (1) is won. Whether a display result that constitutes a chance eye derived when the stop operation is performed at the timing is specified and whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 (2) The timing when the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) is not derived on any winning line with respect to a smaller stop operation position (area number) than when only (2) is won The stop control table for specifying the display result that constitutes the chance to be derived when the stop operation is performed may be created as the stop control table for the left reel. As a result, at the timing when the bonus is won by the internal lottery, 1 ball (1) or 1 ball (2) is won, and the winning 1 ball (1) or 1 ball (2) cannot be won. When a stop operation is performed, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived This can increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel In the state that is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the reels that have already stopped, the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived if any role is not won (losing) When only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the left reel is still rotating. "Blue 7" composing a combination of one ball on the winning line of "Blue 7" composing a combination of one ball (1) on the winning line of the left reel when the "Blue 7" symbol is not stopped Although the handle is stopped, the stop operation was performed within the range where the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes a combination of one ball (1) cannot be drawn on the winning line where “Blue 7” is stopped on the left reel. Or when only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and 1 is placed on the winning line of the left reel. The “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of balls (2) is not stopped, or the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) is stopped on the winning line of the left reel. If a stop operation is performed within a range in which the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) cannot be drawn on the winning line where “Red 7” is stopped on the left reel, If you are not elected (lost) Rukoto-free, and can be led to the center reel display results that make up the chance eyes.

  In addition, if any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. Regardless of the display result of a reel that has already stopped in the state, if the winning combination has not been won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye is derived to the right reel. When only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, so that it is on the winning line of the left reel. If the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes the combination of one ball (1) has not stopped, or at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one ball (1) on the reel winning line is not stopped, and only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel If the “Red 7” symbol that forms a combination of one ball (2) on the winning line of the left reel has not stopped and the right reel is still rotating, or at least the middle reel Is already stopped, and the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one ball (2) on the winning line of the middle reel is not stopped when the right reel is still rotating. If the winning combination is not won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye can be derived to the right reel without being derived.

  That is, when one of the bonuses is won, or when one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won and one of the reels is stopped, and one ball (1) or 1 It is possible to win one ball (1) or one ball (2) when it is not possible to win the ball (2), or in a state where any one reel is stopped, When one ball (1) or one ball (2) could not be won because the stop operation was performed at a timing when one ball (1) or one ball (2) combination could not be derived, Since it is possible to derive the display results that make up the chance eyes that are not derived if they are not selected (losing), the display results that make up these chance eyes are derived, so The role won It is possible to enhance the player's expectation for Rukoto.

  In addition, only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is selected, and the symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) or one ball (2) on the winning line of the left reel is one of the winning lines. Even if it is not stopped above, one stop (1) or one ball (on the left reel winning line) because the stop operation was performed at a timing other than the timing at which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified. Even if the symbols constituting the combination 2) do not stop on any of the winning lines and the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, the display result constituting the chance eye on the middle reel or the right reel Can be derived and the opportunity for deriving the display result constituting the chance eye is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the bonus can be effectively enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery or when only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won, one of the reels is stopped. Then, when one ball (1) or one ball (2) could not be won already, a stop operation is performed at the timing of a specific area number, so that any combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye that is not derived even if a stop operation is performed at the same timing in the absence of the state, by deriving the display result that constitutes the chance eye, It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In addition, when none of the winning combinations is won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal times, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. In any case, it is possible to derive a chance chance by winning one ball (1) or one ball (2) except when any bonus is won by internal lottery. For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In the present embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the chance of the stop operation is detected at any timing regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table is created in which the display result that constitutes the game is not derived. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), at least one reel When the player has already stopped, he or she has won one of the bonuses in the normal gaming state, or has fewer stop operation positions (area number) than if only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won. On the other hand, a stop control table in which display results constituting a chance eye are specified may be created as a left reel stop control table. As a result, one ball (1) or one ball (2) is already in a state where a bonus is won by an internal lottery or one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won and at least one reel is stopped. When it is not possible to generate a prize, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived. By doing so, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, when the display result is derived for the left reel, the chance is not established, but when the display result is derived for any two reels or all reels (all winning combinations are The chance eye is established when the display result is derived to any one of the reels, for example, 8 to the left reel. A display mode that is established only by deriving the 10th symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” may be applied as an opportunity.

  In addition, for one ball (1) and one ball (2) that can be used to derive a chance when a prize cannot be won, a maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game is set. 1 (1) or 1 (2) is won by internal lottery because it is a prize with payout of 15 or less (1) pachinko balls (prize balls), which is the number of pachinko balls necessary for Even if it is not possible to win a prize, the player will not suffer a great disadvantage, and the winning probability of one ball (1) and one ball (2) has a great influence on the payout rate of the slot machine 1. Therefore, for example, it is possible to increase the probability that winning of one ball (1) and one ball (2) is permitted to increase the chances of deriving the chance, and the player's expectation for the bonus A feeling can be heightened effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of pachinko balls (number of winning balls) to be paid out with winning of one ball (1) and one ball (2) is necessary for setting the minimum unit bet number for one game. Therefore, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  In this embodiment, one pachinko ball (prize ball) is paid out to the player with the winning of one ball (1) and one ball (2). The number of pachinko balls to be paid out in response to the occurrence of a special prize-winning prize (the number of prize balls) is not limited to one, but the number of pachinko balls to be paid out in accordance with the occurrence of a special prize-winning that can derive a chance (the prize ball) The number is preferably smaller, but the number of pachinko balls (the number of prize balls) necessary to set the maximum bet number (3 in this embodiment) that can be set for at least one game (in this embodiment) 15 balls) or less, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected. Also, for example, when the number of payout balls (the number of winning balls) differs depending on whether it stops on a plurality of winning lines like a cherry or stops on one winning line, the combination of combinations is changed to a plurality of winning lines. If the number of payout balls (the number of prize balls) at the time of stopping is equal to or less than the number of pachinko balls required to set the maximum bet number (3 in this embodiment) that can be set for one game, the slot machine 1 It is difficult to affect the payout rate.

  Also, in this embodiment, when only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won by the internal lottery, it stops at a timing when one ball (1) or one ball (2) cannot be won. The number of stop operation positions (region numbers) in which the number of drawing frames specifying the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the operation is detected is one ball (1) or one ball (2) Since the number of draw-in frames in which the display result of the symbols constituting the combination stopping on any winning line is specified is greater than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) determined, one ball (1 in the normal gaming state) ) Or in the case where only one ball (2) is elected, a display result in which the symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) or one ball (2) are stopped on any winning line is derived. Higher than 1 ball (1) The display result constituting the chance chance derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing when one ball (2) cannot be won is derived, and one ball (1) is obtained by internal lottery. Or, when only one ball (2) is elected, one ball (1) rather than the symbols constituting the combination of the one ball (1) or one ball (2) being derived on any winning line ) Or a player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus, since the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one ball (2) cannot be won is more easily derived. A feeling can be heightened effectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by the internal lottery or when one ball (1) is won, either of the “blue 7” symbols is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames. If the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18 among the timings that can be stopped on the winning line of the game, it will not be derived if no winning combination is won. ˜17 symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, if the combination of 1 ball (1) is not finally arranged on the winning line, the display result that leads to the chance eye is derived. When either bonus is won by internal lottery or when one ball (2) is won, “Red 7” symbol is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and either If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 12 and 13 among the timings at which it can be stopped on the line, it will not be derived if no combination is won. No. 10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, if the combination of one ball (2) is not finally arranged on the winning line, a display result that leads to the chance eye is derived. The timing when the symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) or one ball (2) are derived on any winning line and one ball (1) or one ball (2) cannot be won Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected in is not derived, the derived display result can win one ball (1) or one ball (2). Thailand If the display result which constitutes the chances eyes stop operation in ring is derived even when it is detected, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus generation.

  In this embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or only one ball (1) is won, a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18 shown in FIG. When the player is selected, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols constituting the chance chance is derived as the display result, and either bonus is won by internal lottery or only one ball (2) If the stop operation is detected at the timing of the range of area numbers 12 and 13 shown in FIG. 15, “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the chance eye is displayed. Although it is derived as a display result, in the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), even if a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18, it is 15-17. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” is not derived as a display result, and the stop operation is detected at any timing within the range of the region numbers 12 and 13 and the symbol “Bell / Red” “7 Bell” is not derived as a display result, so that a bonus is won by an internal lottery, or only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won and one ball (1) or 1 When the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the ball (2) can be won, it is derived even if the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes an unoccupied chance, a symbol constituting a combination of one ball (1) or one ball (2) is derived on any winning line, and one ball (1 ) Or one ball 2) Even if the display result that constitutes the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which it is not possible to win a prize, the derived display result is one ball (1) or one ball. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which (2) can be won, a display result that constitutes a chance to be derived can increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In this embodiment, since the common “blue 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) and the symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2), The display result of the 17th symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, the chance eye to be derived even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (1) can be won, is derived. Thus, if the big bonus (2) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing targeting the “blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the big bonus (2) on the middle reel and the right reel. It becomes possible to stop the combination of the big bonus (2) on the winning line and win the game. Similarly, as the symbols constituting the combination of one ball (2) and the symbols constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1), the common “red 7” symbol is used. Even if a stop operation is detected at the timing at which the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, one ball (2) can be won, a display result constituting a chance eye is derived. If the regular bonus or big bonus (1) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing aimed at the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the middle reel, and the right reel The target is the “BAR” symbol that constitutes the regular bonus combination or the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the big bonus combination. By performing the stop operation at timing, it is possible to prize is stopped in the game a combination of regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the pay line.

  In addition, a present Example is not restricted to this, For example, as a symbol which comprises the combination of 1 ball | bowl (1) and 1 ball | bowl (2), a symbol different from the symbol which comprises the combination of bonus is applied. Even in this case, the configuration symbol of one ball (1) or one ball (2) is derived on one of the winning lines, and one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won. Even when the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing that cannot be performed, the derived display result is one ball (1) or one ball (2). The display result that configures the chance eye including the configuration symbol of the symbol, that is, the chance eye that is derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (1) or one ball (2) can be won. Display result If so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Also in this case, the display result constituting the chance eye including the constituent symbols of one ball (1) or one ball (2) includes the symbols constituting the bonus combination, that is, one ball (1). Alternatively, it is preferable that the display pattern is such that both the constituent symbol of one ball (2) and the constituent symbol of the bonus stop on the winning line, and even in this case, one ball (1) or one ball (2) Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing when a prize can be won, a display result that constitutes an opportunity to be derived is derived, so that if the bonus is won, the middle reel and the right reel are also won. The bonus combination selected in the game can be stopped on the winning line to win a prize by performing a stop operation at the timing of the symbols that make up the bonus combination. The ability.

  Further, in this embodiment, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won regardless of the timing when the stop operation is detected. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing that can be executed, a stop control table is created in which a display result that constitutes a chance eye to be derived is not derived. If no combination is won in the state (losing), than if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state or only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (1) or one ball (2) can be won with respect to a small number of stop operation positions (region numbers), a chance is derived that is derived. May be created a stop control table display result is identified as a stop control table of the left reel. As a result, when a bonus is won by internal lottery, or when one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won, one ball (1 ball (1) or 1 ball (2) is won at a higher rate than when neither of the roles is won by internal lottery 1) or 1 ball (2), even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which it is possible to win, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye to be derived. Alternatively, when symbols constituting a combination of one ball (2) are derived on one of the winning lines and a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (1) or one ball (2) cannot be won. Even if the display result constituting the chance chance to be derived was not derived, a stop operation was detected at a timing at which the derived display result could win one ball (1) or one ball (2) Place If the display results but that make up the chance eyes are derived, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the display mode (region number 14) in which the 16th “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. -16, 15-17, 16-18) and the display mode (area) in which the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 constituting the combination of one ball (2) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel No. 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) are arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, respectively, and the stop operation position that can aim at the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol at the same time Since it does not exist, when one of the symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) or the symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) is always aimed at stopping the reel, one ball (1), One part of one ball (2) can always be awarded Since it becomes impossible to perform a stop operation at a timing at which the other combination can be won, and in this case, a chance chance is derived, so one ball (1), one ball (2) Even if the reel stop operation is always aimed at one of the roles, it is possible to make the chance chance appear appropriately. At this time, the other one of the one ball (1) and one ball (2) Since it is impossible to determine whether the bonus has been won or whether the bonus has been won, the appearance of the bonus can be effectively enhanced by the appearance of the chance.

  Also, one ball (1) and one ball (2) have the same winning probability and the same number of pachinko balls to be paid out at the time of winning, so one of one ball (1) and one ball (2) There are few merits to perform the reel stop operation only by combining these, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness to perform the stop operation aiming at one combination of one ball (1) and one ball (2). This increases the possibility that a stop operation will be performed, and the display results can be varied.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2), the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus (1) is the upper and middle stages of the left reel. , The display mode (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stops at one of the lower tiers, the combination of 1 ball (1) and the combination of big bonus (2), the 16th “blue 7 ”The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18) where the symbol stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel is arranged in excess of 4 frames, each of which is the maximum drawing range. Since there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Red 7” symbol and “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, the stop operation is aimed at the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol is derived on the winning line. Can not be made and The “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the event is derived, and the Big Bonus (1) or the Regular Bonus (1) cannot be awarded in the end. If you didn't win, you won't know if you couldn't win one ball (1) or the big bonus (2) corresponding to the other "Blue 7" symbol, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that make up the “Blue 7” symbol, the “Red 7” symbol cannot be derived on the winning line, and constitute the chance eye When the big bonus (2) could not be won, and when no other role was won, one ball (2) could not be won. Legion corresponding to “Red 7” symbol Either because the error bonus or big bonus (1) was not able to prize winning is not known, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) are respectively configured by the same “blue 7” symbol, The special symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) are respectively composed of the same “red 7” symbol. And the specific symbol are composed of different symbols, and at least the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) or the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) A display mode in which one of the symbols stops on the winning line (a display mode in which the “red 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol stops in either the upper, middle, or lower level), The display mode in which the specific symbols that make up the combination of the ball (1) or one ball (2) stop on the winning line (the display mode in which the specific symbol stops at any one of the upper, middle, and lower levels) and the maximum pull-in respectively. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained as long as the frame is arranged beyond the 4 frames.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination of cherries from which more pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out in the normal gaming state is the left reel. The display mode (area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) that stops in any of the upper, middle, and lower levels, and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” that constitutes one ball (1) The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) where the symbol stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel is the maximum pull-in range, respectively. Since there are more than 4 frames, there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, and only one of the symbols can be aimed at. In addition, as described above, in the normal gaming state, more pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out when a cherry is won than when one ball (1) wins. The timing at which the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination is aimed, that is, the “blue 7” symbol constituting one ball (1) combination cannot be stopped on the winning line, but the cherry combination is configured It is possible to increase the willingness to perform the stop operation at a timing at which the 6th “cherry” symbol can be stopped on any winning line.

  In addition, stop operation position (area number 6-12) where the number of draws to stop on any of the winning lines by pulling up the No. 6 “Cherry” symbol up to 4 frames and winning of 1 ball (1) Stop operation position (area number) where the number of pull-in frames to stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” which sometimes constitute the chance chance 4-8, region numbers 10-14) are partially overlapping, and when a stop operation is performed at these overlapping stop operation positions (region numbers 6-8, region numbers 10-12), If one ball (1) is won, the 2-4 symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” and the 8-10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” will stop. Become. For this reason, as the motivation to perform the stop operation at the timing at which the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination of cherries can be stopped on any winning line is increased, one ball (1 ) Can be increased when the display results constituting the chance eyes are derived.

  In this embodiment, cherry is applied as a special prize winning with a payout of more pachinko balls (award balls) than one ball (1) as a specific prize winning, but not limited to this. It is sufficient if the winning combination is established by stopping on the winning line at the same time as the combination comprising the symbols constituting the combination of (1) is stopped. It may be established when a corresponding symbol stops on a winning line of two or more reels.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the chance is stopped, that is, when one of the bonuses is won, the display mode is derived at a higher rate than when no bonus is won. As a result of this, the continuous production will be executed, making it easier to understand the start of the continuous production and increasing the player's expectation for winning the bonus at both the chance and the continuous production. .

  In addition, when the chance is stopped, the replay winning probability (not only the winning probability but also the winning probability) increases over two games, and the continuous effect is performed during that time, so the continuous effect is performed. During this time, it is difficult to win a bonus, and it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not the bonus is won. Therefore, the continuous performance can be completed without making it meaningless. Furthermore, even if the bonuses cannot be aligned during the continuous performance, a replay game is awarded that does not require the insertion of a pachinko ball by winning a replay. Can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the opportunity is stopped when the chance is stopped, and the continuous production is performed during that time, but the chance is stopped in a state where no bonus is won. In the meantime, the transition to RT may be triggered by the winning of the bonus or the bonus is won, and the continuous production may be performed during that time, and the continuous production starts without stopping the chance eyes. By doing so, since the winning of the bonus is confirmed, it is possible to enhance the interest by continuous production.

  In addition, the continuous performance is performed when any of the bonuses is won or not. In the latter case, the continuous production has contents that have not been won for any bonus, and if any bonus is not newly won by the end of the bonus, the determination of the loss is informed as it is.

  However, a bonus may be newly won in the game after the continuous production in the latter case is started. Even in this case, since the continuous production that has already been started is performed to the end, the control related to the execution of the continuous production is not complicated. However, if only the confirmation of the loss is notified as it is, information different from the winning situation at the end of the continuous performance remains to be shown to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the final game of the continuous production, it is determined whether or not the continuous production being executed is a continuous production started when no bonus is won, and this continuous production starts. It is determined whether or not a bonus has been newly won in the game after being played. Then, if a bonus is newly won in the game after the continuous production has started, the content of the production in the final game of the continuous production may be replaced or the continuous production It is assumed to select whether or not to perform an additional effect after the end.

  When the content of the production in the last game of the continuous production is replaced, the content of the production after the replacement in the final game can be shown and the confirmation of bonus winning can be shown to the player, so the player is distrusted The continuous production can be ended without making it feel. On the other hand, when the execution of the additional effect is selected, the result of the losing is once notified, but the player has won the bonus by the additional effect that is executed immediately after the end of the continuous effect. Therefore, the continuous production once started can be performed to the end without causing the player to feel distrust.

  Regardless of whether the content of the production in the final game of the continuous production is replaced or whether the additional production is executed after the continuous production, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been newly won in the game after the continuous production is started. Is only required in the final game of the continuous production. In this way, it is determined whether the continuous production being executed is a continuous production that was started when no bonus was won, and a bonus was newly won in the game after the continuous production was started. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the control has been performed, the control load does not become too large.

  Further, even when the replacement of the content of the effect is selected, the content of the effect is replaced only for the effect in the final game of the continuous effect. For this reason, the replacement pattern of the content of the production does not become too complicated, and the control load does not become too large. When the execution of the additional effect is selected, it is only necessary to perform a new additional effect while keeping the content of the continuous effect as it is. For this reason, an unnecessary control load is not applied to the execution of the continuous performance. Furthermore, since there are both the replacement of the contents of the effects and the execution of the additional effects, the types of effects become abundant and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been newly won only in the final game, but for example, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been newly won for each game during the continuous performance. Anyway. In this way, in the case where it is determined whether or not the bonus has been newly won for each game during the continuous production, when the replacement of the content of the production is selected, the content of the production may be replaced from that time. However, when a bonus is newly won, it is preferable to remember that fact and replace the content of the production only in the final game. In this way, the pattern of replacement of the content of the production becomes too complicated. Therefore, the control load does not become too large. In addition, if the execution of the additional effect is selected in the case of determining whether or not the bonus has been newly won for each game in the continuous effect, the fact is stored when the bonus is newly selected. What is necessary is just to perform a new additional production, with the content of the continuous production as it is.

  In the continuous performance, when a chance is derived, any performance pattern is selected from a plurality of predetermined patterns. If the execution of the additional effect is selected when the winning of any bonus is determined in the final game of the continuous effect that was started when no bonus was won, the pattern of the additional effect to be executed is , Selected according to the pattern of the continuous performance that was being executed at that time. As described above, continuous effects (and additional effects) are performed with a plurality of types of patterns, so that a variety of effects can be achieved and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by selecting the pattern of the additional effect according to the pattern of the continuous effect being executed, the additional effect can be matched with the continuous effect, and the continuous effect and the additional effect can be shown to the player as a series of effects without any sense of incongruity. Will be able to.

  Furthermore, as a pattern of continuous effects, there are a pattern that continues for a period of two games and a pattern that continues for a period of three games, and the period for which the continuous effects continue is determined by the selection of the pattern. As described above, there are different periods as the period during which the continuous presentation is performed, so that the aspect of the presentation becomes rich and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In this embodiment, the additional effect is performed only for one game. However, a pattern with a different number of continuous games is prepared in the same manner as the continuous effects so far, and the period during which the additional effect continues by selecting the pattern is provided. Even when there are different periods during which the additional effects are performed in this way, there are many types of effects, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  When the replacement of the content of the effect is selected in the last game of the continuous effect, the content of the effect in the final game after the replacement is also selected according to the pattern of the continuous effect that was being executed at that time. As a result, the contents of the continuous performance can be shown to the player without a sense of incongruity by matching the winning situation in the final game.

  Furthermore, the content of the effect that has been replaced is not included in the pattern of the continuous effect that has not been replaced. The replacement of the production is performed in a rare case where the bonus is won after the continuous production is started, but the result of the exchanged production is shown only in such a rare case. The contents of the production can be given a premier character, and the entertainment of the production can be enhanced. Similarly, the content of the additional effect is not included in the continuous effect pattern. Since the additional production is also performed in a rare case where the bonus is won after the continuous production is started, the additional production is also executed only in such a rare case, so that the additional production is premier It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, Bell, JAC + Cherry, JAC + 1 ball (1), JAC + 1 ball (2) are defined as the combinations and combinations of the roles that are subject to internal lottery in the regular bonus. In a bonus game, if a winning combination with a relatively small number of payout balls, such as cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), is won, it will be paid out than cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2) JAC with a large number of balls wins at the same time and wins JAC, so they can get more pachinko balls (prize balls) than when Cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2) wins In addition, since the cherry, 1 ball (1), and 1 ball (2) have been won, the number of pachinko balls (the number of prize balls) that can be acquired during the regular bonus will not decrease.

  In addition, JAC is a role that is only eligible for regular bonuses and is not eligible for other gaming conditions. JAC can be awarded only for regular bonuses, so it is possible to determine whether regular bonuses or other gaming conditions are available. In addition to being clearly distinguishable, it is possible to differentiate between regular bonuses and other gaming states.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to only the special role, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role The storage address of the corresponding number of decision values is registered, and in the internal lottery, the number of decision values of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table is added to the internal random number for the internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role is judged. And Betsuyaku and the general role is adapted to be elected at the same time. In other words, by making it possible to specify the range of judgment values for each of the general roles and special roles, and the range of determination values for which the general roles and special roles are selected in duplicate, from one role-specific table. , Special role and general role can be elected at the same time. As a result, even if the general role is won as a result of the game, the winning of the special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so the player's expectation for winning the special role is maintained even in such a situation Can be made.

  In the present embodiment, the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the cherry, one ball (1) or one ball (2) can be won simultaneously, and further, the big bonus (1) or big bonus Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) and the range of judgment values that Cherry wins at the same time than the range of judgment values that both the one ball (1) or 1 ball (2) wins at the same time The big bonus (1) or big bonus is greater than the probability that the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and one ball (1) or one ball (2) are won at the same time. The probability that (2) and Cherry will win at the same time is higher, so when Cherry wins than when 1 (1) or 1 (2) wins, Since there is a high possibility of winning at the same time as the Bonus Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2), there will be a change in the expectation of winning the special role depending on the type of the general role. Can increase interest.

  In this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role Store the storage address for the corresponding number of judgment values, and in the internal lottery, add the number of judgment values for each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table to the internal random number that was acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role should be judged. And special And general roles can be elected at the same time, but the role table for general roles where the storage addresses for general roles are registered and the special roles for which the storage addresses for the number of judgment values for special roles are registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the general role that refers to the role table for the general role and the special role that refers to the role-specific table for the special role In addition to performing the lottery separately, the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the general role table and the determination stored in the address area registered in the special role table By making it possible to specify from the number of values the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are each won, and the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are won in duplicate, General roles are elected at the same time Even if such a configuration is adopted, even if a winning combination for a general role occurs as a result of the game, the winning of a special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied. In this case, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination and combination of combinations registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but regardless of the set value. For the combination and combination of combinations that have the same winning probability, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses even if the target combination or combination of the internal lottery is the same and the number of determination values referenced according to the set value is different. May be the same.

  In general, in the development stage, it is assumed that the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of judgment values (that is, the winning probability) according to the setting value (that is, adjusting the winning probability of the internal lottery) for at least some of the roles. Yes. As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the judgment value number of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether the result of the addition overflows, Whether or not each combination or combination of combinations is won is determined. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations as it is. In addition, when generating the winning determination table before the actual winning determination is performed, the loop processing is required twice. However, according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing may be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

  In this embodiment, if the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the symbol to be stopped is selected according to the winning status of the winning combination and the timing of the stop operation, and the display result is displayed on the reel. Derived. In other words, not only the winning situation of the winning combination but also the player's technical intervention of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R will generate a winning. As a result, the suppression of the shooting characteristics will be ensured. In addition, regardless of the time that the player has not operated the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected effectively, the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected yet. Since the display result is derived to the corresponding reel on the condition that the rotation continues and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effectively detected, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is played by the player. The display result is not derived only by the contingency element that the time has passed without being operated, and it is possible to ensure the suppression of the shooting property.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state where the stop operation is not effectively performed after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has continued for 60 seconds, which is the first notification waiting time, or either If there is a reel that is still rotating after the last reel has stopped, the first notification waiting time of 60 seconds or the second notification is that the stop operation is not effectively performed since the last stop of the reel. The presence or absence of the promotion notification is made by executing the promotion notification by displaying the notification screen (see FIG. 19) that prompts the stop operation of the reels by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when the waiting time lasts 30 seconds. This makes it easy to determine whether the player is absent for a long time or absent for a short time. If at least the notification screen is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, it can be seen that 30 seconds or 60 seconds have passed since the player left the seat.

  Also, in the state where the game sound effect is being produced, the state where the stop operation is not effectively performed after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has continued for 60 seconds, which is the first notification waiting time, If there is a reel that is still rotating after any one of the reels is stopped, the state where the stop operation is not effectively performed after the last stop of the reel is the first notification waiting time of 60 seconds or the second In the case of promoting notification when the notification waiting time lasts 30 seconds, it is preferable to lower the volume of the game sound effect or to mute at the same time as the promotion notification is started. Even so, it does not bother the surrounding players.

  Further, when an effective stop operation is performed during the execution of the promotion notification, the promotion notification is terminated, and the promotion notification is executed endlessly even though the stop operation is made effective. Can be avoided. In addition, as described above, when the promotion notification is started while the game sound effect is being output and the volume is lowered or the sound is muted, the original volume is restored when an effective stop operation is performed. It is preferable to return it, and by doing in this way, it is possible to avoid the state in which the volume is lowered or the sound muting state continues continually even though the stop operation is made effective.

  In this embodiment, the counter value subtraction (timekeeping) by the notification counter is started when the CPU 91a obtains a reel rotation start command that can specify that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have started rotating. However, for example, the time may be measured from the time when the operation of the start lever 7 is detected, that is, the time when the internal winning command is acquired, or the time when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types (in this embodiment, two types) of notification patterns (notification patterns 1 and 2) are registered in advance as notification patterns (notification modes) of the promotion notification, and the bonus is won. If there is, the notification pattern 2 is selected with a higher probability than when the bonus is not won, and the notification screen based on the notification pattern 2 is displayed. When the notification screen based on the pattern 2 is selected, the player can expect to win a bonus more than when the notification screen based on the notification pattern 1 is displayed. Can be increased.

  In the notification pattern lottery, when the bonus is won, the notification pattern 2 as the second notification mode is selected with a probability of 50%, but when the bonus is won, The notification pattern 2 may be selected with a higher probability than when the bonus is not won. For example, the notification pattern 2 may be selected with a probability of 100% when the bonus flag is won.

  In addition, if there is a reel that is still rotating after any of the reels is stopped, if the promotion notification has already been executed in the game, the stop operation becomes effective after the reel has stopped last. Since the promotion notification is executed when the state that is not made continues for 30 seconds that is the second notification waiting time that is shorter than the first notification waiting time of 60 seconds, the game is executed after the promotion notification is executed. When the state in which the stop operation is not made effective again continues, the promotion notification is executed earlier than the beginning, so that the operating rate of the slot machine 1 can be prevented more effectively.

  Further, the notification patterns 1 and 2 of the promotion notification display the characters “Please stop the reel” on the notification screen, and the characters and background colors thereof are different, but the notification mode is the above pattern. It is not limited and the message content and display mode can be variously changed.

  In the notification pattern lottery, two types of notification patterns having different character colors and background colors of the displayed characters are selected with different probabilities depending on the winning status of the bonus flag. You may make it select from the alerting | reporting pattern more than a kind.

  In addition, the notification patterns 1 and 2 in the present embodiment display characters that prompt the stop operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and either one is selected according to the winning status of the bonus flag. However, along with the execution of such promotion notification, for example, the winning combination in the aforementioned internal lottery may be notified with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the promotion notification is executed once in one game, the notification waiting time (60 seconds) until the first promotion notification is executed when the stop operation is not performed. Promotion notification is executed when a shorter notification waiting time (30 seconds) elapses, but all notification waiting times may be the same.

  Further, in this embodiment, the time measuring means for measuring the notification waiting time is constituted by one notification timer counter, and the first value (= 60 seconds) is set when the reel rotation start command is acquired. When the reel stop command is acquired after the timer count starts, the timer count being executed is ended (reset) and the second value (= 30 seconds) is set. It was set to start the timer count, but the clocking based on the acquisition of the reel rotation start command and the clocking based on the acquisition of the reel stop command are each clocked separately. May be.

  In addition, for example, a promotion notification execution history in each game is stored, and when the promotion notification is executed a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or between 50 games), notification until the promotion notification is executed. The waiting time may be shorter than the normal notification waiting time. Furthermore, in this case, the notification waiting time may be shortened step by step according to the execution history of the promotion notification.

  Furthermore, the time elapsed since the start of the execution of the promotion notification as described above (starting display of the notification screen) is counted. In addition to the notification by changing the notification mode or displaying the notification screen, a voice message such as “Please stop the reel” may be output from the speakers 53, 54 and the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the promotion notification is performed by displaying a notification screen including a character message prompting a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. However, the liquid crystal display The notification screen may be displayed on an image display device other than 51, and the message content is not only the message “Please stop the reel” as described above, but also the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. If it is a thing, it can be changed to various messages such as “Please stop the design” and “Please operate the stop switch”, or display an image or a video that prompts you to stop the reel Things can be used.

  Furthermore, the notification means for performing the promotion notification is not limited to the image display device such as the liquid crystal display 51 described above. Sound output means capable of outputting sound or outputting a predetermined warning sound may be used. Alternatively, for example, it may be a light emitting means for notifying by causing the reel LED 55 or the like to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, changing a lighting mode or a light emitting color).

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If the determination process 1 is executed for each game and the value read from the set value work 1 is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the value stored in the set value work 1, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is a value of 1 to 6, so the value stored in the set value work 1 is 1 to 6. If the value is not in the range, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Further, a process for determining whether or not the set bet number is a bet number according to the gaming state is executed for each game, and the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state. Control of the error state due to the RAM abnormal error disables the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the number of bets corresponding to each gaming state is determined, but if the game is played with a bet number different from the bet number, is the data stored in the RAM 41c broken? Or, since there is a possibility that an unauthorized program is operating, even if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or illegal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the set value automatically set by the slot machine The game is executed based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, the setting value selected by the amusement store side). Since it is guaranteed that the game will be played, the fairness of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery and the setting set when the setting is changed. When the set value determination process 2 for determining whether or not the values match is executed for each game, the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 do not match However, it is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal RAM error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the setting value after the change is stored in each of the setting value work 1 and the setting value work 2 when the setting is changed. Normally, the value stored in the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 are stored. The values stored in the table should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been rewritten illegally, and in this case, the progress of the game is disabled. Become.

  In addition, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the internal lottery of the previous game. The set value determination process 3 for determining whether or not the set value matches is executed for each game, and the value read from the set value work 1 does not match the value read from the set value work 3 Even in this case, the game is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the set value used for the internal lottery is stored in the set value work 3, and normally the value stored in the set value 1 (the set value used in the internal lottery of the current game) and The value stored in setting value 3 (the setting value used in the previous internal lottery of the game) should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been illegally rewritten. In this case, the progress of the game is disabled.

  And once it is controlled to the error state due to the RAM abnormality error by these determinations, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected / set based on the setting changing operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, in order to restart the game when there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally rewritten, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation that is more time-consuming than the reset operation for canceling the normal error state. Cheating can be effectively prevented.

  If there is a possibility that the setting value has been rewritten illegally, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, Since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 is initialized for each game. Therefore, even if an unauthorized program is stored using the unused area of the RAM 41c, It is possible to prevent unauthorized programs from being resident.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, so that all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. Even if an attempt is made to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to be resident. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident, and for example, to add unauthorized data (such as an address specified by the unauthorized program) to the unused stack area, causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one, the original program Fraud can be prevented that would carry out the operation different from the. Furthermore, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, the area that would otherwise be able to store saved data is compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that constitutes the game control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything that can be initialized is acceptable.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are set for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, but the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for performing the conversion may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c may be initialized at the start of the game or when a process that is always executed for each game is executed. It may be one that performs the conversion.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, In addition to performing four types of initialization 1 to 4 that are initialized in different areas according to each initialization condition, and any of these four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, the unused area in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, it is possible to prevent the control state of the game control unit 41 from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error occurs due to a RAM error, and the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on. Until the initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, the progress of the game is impossible. Therefore, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of startup. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the in-use stack area of the RAM 41c. Since the initialization 1 for initializing is performed, a malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the interruption interrupt process, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. After that, adjustment data for which the RAM parity is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data is stored, and in addition to the determination of whether the RAM parity is 0 at the start-up, the destructive diagnosis data Is determined to be normal, and the RAM 41c is determined to be normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is also normally stored. The control state is restored based on the data stored in. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed, but the error state due to the RAM abnormality error occurs. When initialization is performed, all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1), and a reset operation is performed in this state. Thus, the game may be restarted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port It is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA before performing the conversion or the like. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original processing is performed. It is adapted to return.

  That is, a voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the game control unit 41, and the CPU 41a can execute the power interruption interrupt process even if the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a may be interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. More than necessary It is possible to prevent the load it takes.

  Further, during the interruption interruption process and the timer interruption process (A) (B), other interruptions are prohibited. For example, the timer interruption process (A) (B) Even when a voltage drop signal is input during the execution of, no double interruption occurs, so that it is possible to prevent the processing load on the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  Also, when the interrupt timing of power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of timer interrupt processing (A) or timer interrupt processing (B) are simultaneous, that is, interrupt 2 and interrupt 1 or interrupt If 0 occurs at the same time, interrupt 2 is prioritized, power interruption interrupt processing is executed, and interrupt 2 is generated during execution of timer interrupt processing (A) or timer interrupt processing (B) In such a case, the interruption interrupt process is executed after the timer interruption process is completed, and the interruption interruption process is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interruptions. The power interruption processing can be reliably performed before the driving of the CPU 41a is stopped.

  In addition, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 0 to 3, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original processing. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even when an unused interrupt 3 occurs, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. You can prevent problems.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 calculates and sets the RAM parity adjustment data every time the timer interrupt process (effect) is executed. In other words, the process for making it possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of restoration is performed periodically without depending on the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Even when the command is transmitted with a delay, the CPU 91a does not stop before calculating and setting the RAM parity adjustment data due to the delayed transmission of the command. The CPU 91a can accurately determine whether the data backed up in the RAM 91c is normal.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the regular bonus is activated simultaneously with the transition to the big bonus, and during the big bonus, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is activated, and the regular bonus is If it is determined that it is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so that the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Also, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled, so the pachinko ball (prize ball) can be increased the fastest in the big bonus. The player's interest can be enhanced with the transition to the big bonus rather than the regular bonus being activated. In particular, the total number of paid-in pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus exceeds the specified value (2325 balls in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. Thus, when the end condition is satisfied, the number of net increased balls in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If there is no regular bonus, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is inactive. If not, the regular bonus is activated, so the regular bonus will end despite the end of the big bonus. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the regular bonus starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in this embodiment) or the specified number of games (8 in this embodiment). ) The game ends when a winning occurs. However, the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may be completed only when it occurs. In addition, the total number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out and the number of net increases (the number of balls obtained by subtracting the total number of pachinko balls consumed in setting the number of bets from the total number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out) in the regular bonus The process may be terminated when the value exceeds, or the process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total number of paid-out pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus exceeds a predetermined value (2325 balls in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions, for example, the number of net increase in the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus (from the total number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out) When the number of pachinko balls consumed to set the wager number subtracts the specified value), the number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, regular If the number of transitions to the bonus reaches the specified number and the regular bonus ends, the end condition of the big bonus will be satisfied, etc. There termination condition of the big bonus may be established by the establishment.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may be controlled at all times while the big bonus is in operation. Even in this case, the big bonus is activated. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus, the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and it is not necessary to determine whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, before the regular bonus is activated again, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific winning or the like, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  In this embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the CPU 41a determines whether or not the prize is abnormal, if the value of the bit assigned to each kind of the combination is 0, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted. If the value is 1, the abnormal winning determination flag indicating that the winning of the winning combination is not permitted, and the value of the bit assigned to each winning type is 1, the fact that the winning combination has been won And a winning symbol flag indicating that the winning combination has not been won when it is 1, and F indicates whether the calculation result is 0, that is, whether the calculation result is 0 or not. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning just by referring to the value of the zero flag of the register, and it is necessary to specify the winning flag bit of the winning combination that has been established as before, and to determine the value of the specified bit Since it is not necessary to confirm, it is judged whether it is an abnormal prize. It can be processed simplified when performing.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the value of the bit assigned to each type of combination is 1, it indicates that the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted, and when it is 0, the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted. An internal winning flag indicating that there is not present is set in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and an operation for reversing 1 and 0 of each bit of the winning flag is performed, whereby the abnormal winning determination flag is set. It is designed to create. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag can be easily created using the winning flag.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, that is, when a combination that is not permitted in the game is won, the game is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal winning error and the progress of the game is disabled. Is done. That is, when an unacceptable winning combination wins, there is a possibility that the data is destroyed or an abnormal program is operating, and thus the progress of the game is disabled.

  Once an error state due to a RAM error or an abnormal winning error is controlled, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting change operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or abnormal program operation, the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or if an unacceptable hand wins, the slot machine The setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation instead of the setting value automatically set by (the setting change operation is generally performed by an employee of the amusement store. Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the value), the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41 a transmits a command according to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be made various. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b are referred to. In addition, a stop control table is created for each spinning reel, but the internal control state for each gaming state and the stop control table for each reel stop state (and stopped stop position) are stored in the ROM 41b in advance. Based on the table index, it is possible to specify the necessary stop control table according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop state of the reel, and when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel Refer to the table index when the reels that have stopped and are still rotating still remain. By Le may be set a stop control table.

  In the above embodiment, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (one symbol) are defined for one reel, and the stop control table corresponds to each area (area number). Then, the reel is used by using the stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to the area where one symbol varies. For example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) are uniquely set for each area of less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, for every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. The reel stop control may be performed using a predetermined stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor, and the stop operation position Against can be further diversified the stop position.

  Moreover, in the said Example, among the some stop control tables which defined the number of drawing | drawing tops with respect to a stop operation position uniquely, each internal winning state of each game state, the reel stop condition (and stop position stopped) A stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the selected stop control table and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. Is used in place of the stop control table, and when the stop operation is detected, the stop position specifying table is referred to and the reel is stopped at the stop position uniquely specified corresponding to the stop operation position. You may do it.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that is uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the selected number of pull-in frames, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. It is also possible to perform kicking control (so-called control method control) in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. Since the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) by performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reel that has stopped first may be controlled to stop the reel by using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected and its control is performed. The reel stop control is performed according to the pattern, but at least a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern. If it is good.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the value of 6 steps of the range of 1-6 is applied as a setting value used for internal lottery, ie, the setting value which determined the winning probability of internal lottery, a setting value is restricted to this. Any setting value that can select and set at least a plurality of setting values may be used. For example, a setting value that can select two steps of high / low and a setting value of three steps in the range of 1 to 3 are set. Selectable setting values may be applied. Furthermore, the set values work 1 to 3 in the RAM 41c store the values 1 to 6 themselves as values indicating these set values, but any value that can specify the set value may be stored. For example, 0 to 5 (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the actual setting value) corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 may be stored in the setting value works 1 to 3.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the setting value determination process 1 which determines whether the value read from the setting value work 1 is the range of 1-6, the value read from the setting value work 1, and the reading from the setting value work 2 Set value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, a set value determination for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match All of the processing 3 is executed to determine whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery is appropriate. By performing any one of these setting value determination processings 1 to 3, the internal lottery is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the set value used for the setting is appropriate. For example, only the set value determination process 1, only the set value determination process 2, or only the set value determination process 3 is performed. What to do, one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 One of the processing to perform, or the like may be used.

  Further, any one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 is performed for each game, and the remaining one process or all of the remaining processes are performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, every predetermined number of games, at the end of the bonus, Or two of the set value determination processes may be performed for each game, and the remaining one process may be performed with a predetermined opportunity.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting value determination processes 1-3 are performed for every game, it does not perform a setting value determination process for every game, but sets the setting value determination processes 1-3 for the predetermined number of games. It may be performed every time or in a game of a specific period (such as a period excluding the bonus period).

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting value determination processes 1-3 which determine whether the setting value used for an internal lottery is appropriate in the internal lottery process are performed, the timing is in 1 game. Any timing may be used, for example, at the start of the game or at the end of the game.

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 (the set value read for use in the internal lottery of the current game). The timing at which the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 is any timing until the game is over (for example, when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, pachinko balls (At the end of payout of the prize ball)).

  In the embodiment, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in the two areas of the set value work 1 and the set value work 2. In the set value determination processing 2, the value stored in the set value work 1 and the setting are stored. It is determined whether or not the value stored in the value work 2 matches. If it does not match, it is determined that the value is not an appropriate setting value, but the setting value is stored in three or more storage areas when the setting is changed. In the set value determination process 2, it is determined whether or not all the values stored in these three or more storage areas match. If they do not match, it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value. Also good.

  Furthermore, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in three or more storage areas. In the set value determination process 2, whether or not the values stored in these three or more areas match a predetermined number or more (for example, 5 Setting values are stored in one storage area, and it is determined whether or not three or more of the values match, and if a predetermined number or more does not match, it may be determined that the setting values are not appropriate. In this way, even if a part of the data indicating the setting value stored at the time of changing the setting is lost due to noise or the like, it is erroneously determined that the setting value is not appropriate and the progress of the game is disabled. Can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, only the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game is stored in the set value work 3. In the set value determination process 3, the value stored in the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 are stored. Whether the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match and match. If not, it is determined that the setting value is not appropriate, but the setting value used for the internal lottery of each game is stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting value determination processing 3 It is determined whether or not the set value used for the lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the game before the previous game (for example, a game before a predetermined number of games). Appropriate setting In it it may be determined that there is no.

  In addition, the setting values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the setting value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game It may be determined whether or not all the set values used in the internal lottery of the game match, and if they do not match, it is determined that the set values are not appropriate.

  Furthermore, the set values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the set values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the set value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game are stored. Whether or not each set value used for the internal lottery of the game matches a predetermined number or more (for example, each set value used for the internal lottery of the past five games is stored in five storage areas, of which 3 It is also possible to determine whether or not two or more values match, and if it does not match a predetermined number or more, it may be determined that the setting value is not an appropriate setting value. Even when a part of the data indicating the set value stored at the time is lost, it is possible to prevent the game from being disabled due to an erroneous determination that the set value is not appropriate.

  Further, in the embodiment, when determining the winning of the winning in the internal lottery process, if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value in the set value determining process, the RAM is controlled to be in an abnormal error state. However, when the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), a prize is won with a probability based on the initial value of the set value (for example, the set value 1). You may make it determine the winning of.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Although it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 at the time of restoration. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. If the result is 00H, it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and if it is not 00H, the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal. You may make it determine with it.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is This is because the result of calculating the checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00H, so that the data of the RAM 41c can be determined to be normal.

  Even in this case, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 is stored in a predetermined address, and at the time of recovery, In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00H, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The condition is that the checksum is 00H and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normal. In addition, it is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00H is stored in all areas, it is determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, but any bit is set to 1 at the time of power failure. After destructive diagnostic data is stored, the checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area. In addition to checking the checksum at startup, the destructive diagnostic data is also checked. Even when all the areas are cleared to 0 and the checksum is 00H and is determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of the power failure and is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00H. In the interruption interrupt processing, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is determined. Alternatively, a checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, a RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c is calculated and compared with the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area. Data in RAM 41c is normal depending on whether the results match Whether may be determined. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above embodiment, 5AH is stored in the RAM 41c as failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 can be stored and can be confirmed at startup. Even in the configuration, when all areas are cleared to 0 at startup, the data for destruction diagnosis does not match the value stored at the time of a power failure and is determined to be abnormal, so it is stored in the RAM 41c. The accuracy of data abnormality determination can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is started, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. However, first, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and on condition that the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Without calculation, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the data of RAM41c are determined only at the time of starting of the game control part 41, you may make it determine for another opportunity, for example, for every game.

  In the embodiment, the game control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the game control unit 41, but the game control unit 41 is connected to the reset circuit. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the above embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects the power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. You may make it detect a power interruption, when the period when the said DC voltage became below a fixed voltage continued for a fixed period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected or when the period continues for a certain period.

  In the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40. However, the power interruption detection circuit 48 may be mounted in other places. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line is connected.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the error is alert | reported by displaying on the game auxiliary | assistance display 12 the error code according to the error state about the content of various error states. In other words, the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41 is notified, but in addition to the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41, a command indicating an error state is transmitted to the effect control unit 91, The notification means controlled by the control section 91 may notify the error, or the notification means controlled by the game control section 41 does not perform the notification, but the notification means controlled by the effect control section 91 does not. An error notification may be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, after the game ends at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is set to be invalid, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, Until the ending waiting time elapses, after the ending waiting time elapses at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is enabled, the clerk performs a reset operation until the stop state is released The setting of the number of bets is prohibited in any of the periods, but any setting is possible as long as the setting of the number of bets is prohibited in at least one of these periods.

  Further, although the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a stop function, it may be applied to a slot machine not equipped with a stop function.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the waiting time for producing the BB winning effect and the waiting time for producing the BB end effect may be the same time or different times.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus winning is applied as the transition winning in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (the waiting time for production of the BB winning effect) at the time of winning. Regular bonus winning etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to multiple types of special roles. Furthermore, even for special roles of the same type, one of a plurality of types of bonus bonuses and regular bonus winnings (for example, a combination of symbols constituting the bonus winning, a color of symbols constituting the bonus winning) Or, if they are different, or consist of different numbers of pachinko balls (award balls) that can be expected during the bonus triggered by the bonus winning, etc. For the bonus winnings only, setting of the number of bets may be prohibited for a certain period when winning. Further, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of special role (big bonus winning and regular bonus winning), the type of big bonus winning or regular bonus winning. Then, an effect at the time of bonus winning having a different execution time may be executed according to a period during which setting of the bet number is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special gaming state in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (ending waiting time for producing the ending effect) at the end, but other special gaming states (regular) Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus The color of the symbols that make up the bonus winning will differ, or the number of pachinko balls (number of winning balls) that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Alternatively, only a specific bonus among these may be set to be prohibited for a certain period at the end. Further, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the end may be different depending on the type of special gaming state (big bonus and regular bonus) and the type of big bonus or regular bonus. And you may make it perform the ending effect from which execution time differs according to the period when the setting of the number of bets is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special game state controlled to the stop state in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until the reset operation is performed after the end, but other special game states (Regular Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus The color of the symbols that make up the bonus winning will differ, or the number of pachinko balls (number of winning balls) that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Alternatively, only a specific bonus among these may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the timer counter common to the production wait time timer count for timing the production waiting time for the BB winning production and the production wait time timer count for measuring the production waiting time for the ending production is provided. However, these timer counters may be provided separately.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0 in the winning flag. In the winning symbol flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0. Then, all the bits of the internal winning flag are inverted, and a logical product (AND) with the winning symbol flag is calculated, and when the result becomes 00H (all bits are 0), other than the regular winning, other than 00H (any one) When the bit becomes 1), it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, after calculating the logical product (AND) of the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning flag and the winning symbol flag, as in the above embodiment, all of the values thus calculated are calculated. The bits may be further inverted, and it may be determined that the regular winning is achieved when the result is FFH (all bits are 1), and the abnormal winning is determined when the result is other than FFH (any bit is 0).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56, after calculating the logical sum (OR) of the winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the winning symbol flags, all the bits of the calculated value are further inverted, and the result is The regular winning may be determined when 00H (all bits are 0), and the abnormal winning may be determined when other than 00H (any bit is 1). In this case, as in the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the prize is abnormal by simply checking the value of the zero flag of the F register (flag register) indicating whether the calculation result is 00H, that is, whether the calculation result is zero. Can be determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 57, a logical sum (OR) of the winning flag and a value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning symbol is calculated, and when the result becomes FFH (all bits are 1), the regular winning is obtained. , FFH other than (any bit is 0), it may be determined as an abnormal winning.

  As described above, also in the modified examples of the abnormal winning determination shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the logical sum operation or the logical product operation is performed on the winning flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning flag and the winning symbol flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning symbol flag. It is possible to determine whether the result is an abnormal prize or not only by determining whether the result is a value other than 0 or a value other than 1.

  In the case of FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, if all the bits of the winning design flag set in accordance with winning are inverted in advance, that is, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 0, and the other bits If the winning symbol flag is set so that the value of 1 becomes 1, the step of inverting all the bits of the winning symbol flag in the abnormal winning determination process becomes unnecessary.

  In the case of FIGS. 55 and 56, when determining whether or not the calculation result is FFH, 1 is added to the calculation result, and when the value after the addition overflows, it is determined that the calculation result is FFH. When the overflow does not occur, it is preferable to determine that the operation result is other than FFH. In such a case, it is only necessary to check the value of the carry flag of the F register indicating whether the operation result has overflowed. It is possible to determine whether or not the prize is abnormal.

  Next, as in the above embodiment, the winning flag has a value of 1 corresponding to the winning combination, and the other bits have a value of 0, and the winning symbol flag corresponds to the winning combination. A description will be given of a modification in which an abnormal winning is determined without inverting all the bits in any flag when the value of the bit is 1 and the value of the other bits is 0.

  In this modification, the winning flag is applied as an abnormal winning determination flag. Then, from the value of each bit of the internal winning flag, the value of the bit at the same position in the winning symbol flag is subtracted, and on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number in all the bits, whether or not it is an abnormal winning Determine whether. For example, by subtracting the value of the 0th bit of the winning design flag from the value of the 0th bit of the winning flag to determine whether the subtraction result is a negative number, Subtract the value of the first bit of the winning symbol flag from the value of the next bit, that is, the first bit of the internal winning flag, and determine the result. Finally, all the bits from the 0th bit to the 15th bit In step (1), it is determined that the winning is not abnormal, on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number.

  In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by confirming the value of the sign flag of the F register indicating whether or not the calculation result has become a negative number. Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiments and modifications, it is possible to determine whether the winning flag or the winning symbol flag is an abnormal winning without inverting the bit.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the determination value number storage area | region of RAM41c in which the determination value number used for an internal lottery is memorize | stored shall memorize | store the determination value number in each case using a 2 byte area | region. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is related to the set value. Even common items can be individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said Example. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) for the same combination or combination of combinations at the same set value is different for each gaming state (state number). Was stored. That is, the same combination or combination of combinations with the same set value is stored separately even if the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) is the same, but the gaming state (state number) Regardless of the combination of combinations or combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability regardless, the storage address of the judgment value number is shared, or the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value and gaming state (state number) For the combination or combination of combinations, the storage address of the determination value number may be made common, and by storing the determination value number in common in this way, the storage capacity required for this is reduced. It will be enough.

  In the embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery, but from the value of random number for internal lottery that acquired the acquired determination value number, Subtraction may be performed sequentially, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and the addition result overflows The combination or combination of combinations was determined to be winning. On the other hand, a winning determination table that defines a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination as winning according to the number of determination values for each combination or combination according to the gaming state is determined for each game. The internal lottery may be performed by comparing the value of the random number for internal lottery created and acquired with the range of determination values for each combination or combination of combinations. In addition, a winning determination table in which a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination of combinations as winning is stored in the ROM 41b in advance, and the acquired random value for internal lottery is used as a range of determination values for each combination. It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing with.

  In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and the small role is won The number of payout balls (number of prize balls) can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the bell is 1 / 4.82 and the number of payout balls (the number of prize balls) is 35, but 1 or 2 is set as the bet number. When it is made, the winning probability of the bell may be made lower than 1 / 4.82, and the number of payout balls (number of prize balls) may be made larger than 35 balls. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls) may be changed when 1 is set as the number of bets.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine that uses a pachinko ball to set the number of bets is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and credits stored as game media owned by the player and A slot machine that uses a pachinko ball together to set the number of bets may be used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, in addition to a pachinko ball taking-in mechanism such as a taking-in motor 101, a sorting solenoid 102, a taking-in ball detecting switch 105, etc. constituting the taking-in device 100, medals inserted from the outside The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching the flow path to either a hopper tank side or a medal payout exit side, which will be described later, provided inside, and a medal that flows from the outside and flows down to the hopper tank side In addition to a pachinko ball payout mechanism such as a payout motor 201 and a payout ball detection switch 202 that constitute a payout device 200, a hopper tank (not shown) that stores medals inserted from the outside is provided. ), A hopper motor 34 and a hopper motor 3 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening A payout sensor 35 is provided for detecting medals paid out by driving, and it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls. You may apply to the slot machine where is paid out.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a rear view of the slot machine. It is sectional drawing of the taking-in apparatus provided in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the wiring of a supply ball | bowl detection switch, a payout ball | bowl detection switch, and a payout ball clogging detection switch. It is a figure which shows the signal exchanged between a game control board, a payout control board, and a payout control board and a card unit. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when operation | movement of a check-out switch is detected when a prize accompanying payout of a winning ball occurs or when a captured ball remains. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a figure which shows a winning combination table. It is a figure which shows the table according to a role. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM41b. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of abnormal winning determination processing, and the storing condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows an example of the external output signal output from a slot machine. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of BB signal and RB signal among external output signals. (A) is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting screen based on the alerting | reporting pattern 1 in the promotion alerting | reporting which CPU of an effect control part performs, (b) is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting screen based on the alerting | reporting pattern 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting pattern distribution table in the promotion alerting | reporting process which CPU of an effect control part performs. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of a continuous effect, (b)-(d) is a figure which shows the continuous effect selection table for selecting the pattern of a continuous effect and an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a game control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process which CPU of a game control part performs when an error generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a game control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a game control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment control process which CPU of a game control part performs in a BET process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the taking-in control process which CPU of a game control part performs in a BET process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process which CPU of a game control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 1 which CPU of a game control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 2 which CPU of a game control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 3 which CPU of a game control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of winning which CPU of a game control part performs in a winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (A) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (A) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a game control part performs in a timer interruption process (A). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a game control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (effect) which CPU of an effect control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (effect) which CPU of an effect control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous effect process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process (effect). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of BET which CPU of an effect control part performs in a continuous effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the start which CPU of an effect control part performs in a continuous effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel stop time process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a continuous effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process (effect). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process (effect). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the promotion alerting | reporting process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process (effect). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the promotion alerting | reporting process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process (effect). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the promotion alerting | reporting process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process (effect). It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot Machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop Switch 40 Game Control Board 41 Game Control Unit 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
90 effect control board 91 effect control part 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (5)

Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipment,
A take-in device for taking in game balls owned by the player;
An acquisition request operation unit operated when requesting the acquisition of game balls;
An intake control means for performing an intake control for causing the take-in device to take-in an action to take in a game ball by the take-in device when the take-in request operation unit is operated;
Bet number setting means for setting the bet number according to the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and a display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. Is a slot machine using a game ball in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the specific prize-winning display result accompanied by the granting of game balls equal to or less than the number necessary for setting the maximum bet number that can be set for one game And a special prize-winning display result including a predetermined prize-winning display result to which a larger number of game balls are given than the specific prize-winning display result, and a special game state with a transition to a special game state that is advantageous to the player over the normal game state A pre-determining means for determining whether or not to allow the derivation of the winning display result including the winning display result;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
In the special gaming state, special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period to a special game that determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the predetermining means allows the derivation of the awarded prize display result;
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining unit is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time of operation. Including control pattern selection means,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
A special prize that specifies a specific display result for at least one of the number of steps when the pre-decision means determines that the derivation of the special prize display result is allowed. Special winning control pattern selection means for selecting a control pattern;
Among the number of steps different from the number of steps for specifying the display result constituting the specific award winning display result when the prior determination means determines that the derivation of the specific award winning display result is allowed A specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a specific award winning control pattern that identifies the specific display result with respect to at least one step number of:
When it is determined that the derivation of any winning display result is not permitted by the pre-determining means, a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is determined from any of the step numbers. A non-winning control pattern selection means for selecting a winning control pattern;
Including
The pre-determining means simultaneously determines that the derivation of the predetermined prize-winning display result is allowed when deciding to permit the derivation of the specific prize-winning display result in a state controlled by the special game. ,
A slot machine using game balls characterized by this. Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipment,
A take-in device for taking in game balls owned by the player;
An acquisition request operation unit operated when requesting the acquisition of game balls;
An intake control means for performing an intake control for causing the take-in device to take-in an action to take in a game ball by the take-in device when the take-in request operation unit is operated;
Bet number setting means for setting the bet number according to the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and a display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. Is a slot machine using a game ball in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the specific prize-winning display result accompanied by the granting of game balls equal to or less than the number necessary for setting the maximum bet number that can be set for one game And a special prize-winning display result including a predetermined prize-winning display result to which a larger number of game balls are given than the specific prize-winning display result, and a special game state with a transition to a special game state that is advantageous to the player over the normal game state A pre-determining means for determining whether or not to allow the derivation of the winning display result including the winning display result;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
In the special gaming state, special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period to a special game that determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the predetermining means allows the derivation of the awarded prize display result;
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, from the plurality of control patterns for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated, Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the combination of the determination result of the determination means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Performing control to derive the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
A special prize that specifies a specific display result for at least one of the number of steps when the pre-decision means determines that the derivation of the special prize display result is allowed. Special winning control pattern selection means for selecting a control pattern;
Derivation of a specific award winning display result accompanied by the awarding of the gaming value below the number required to set the maximum bet number that can be set for one game among the award winning display results by the predetermining means. When the determination to allow is made, the specific display result is displayed for at least one of the number of steps different from the number of steps specifying the display result constituting the specific award display result. Specific grant winning control pattern selection means for selecting a specific grant winning control pattern to be identified;
When it is determined that the derivation of any winning display result is not permitted by the pre-determining means, a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is determined from any of the step numbers. A non-winning control pattern selection means for selecting a winning control pattern;
Including
The pre-determining means simultaneously determines that the derivation of the predetermined prize-winning display result is allowed when deciding to permit the derivation of the specific prize-winning display result in a state controlled by the special game. ,
A slot machine using game balls characterized by this. The specific prize-winning control pattern is more than the number of steps for specifying the specific prize-winning display result when the prior determination means determines that the derivation of the specific prize-winning display result is permitted. Specifying the specific display result for the number of steps;
A slot machine using a game ball according to claim 1 or 2. The special prize control pattern is:
A control pattern that is selected by the special winning control pattern selecting means when it is determined that the derivation of the first special winning display result among the special winning display results is permitted by the prior determination means, A first special prize control pattern for specifying a display result constituting the first special prize display result for at least one of the number of steps;
The control pattern selected by the special winning control pattern selecting means when the pre-deciding means determines that the second special winning is permitted among the special winning display results, The second special prize display result for at least one step number different from the number of steps in which one special prize control pattern specifies the display result constituting the first special prize display result. A second special winning control pattern for specifying a display result to be configured;
Including
The specific award winning control pattern corresponds to at least one step number of steps different from the number of steps in which the first special winning control pattern specifies the display result constituting the first special winning display result. And specifying the display result constituting the specific award winning display result,
A slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 3. The pre-determining means determines whether or not to allow the derivation of the predetermined prize display result only in the special game.
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 4.

Images